UT Health Science Center Houston

Transcription

1 UT Health Science Center Houston School of Nursing Levels 5 & 6 Office Suite Renovation 95% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS October 30, 2015 PROJECT MANUAL FKP FKP Architects, Inc. All rights reserved. No part of these Documents may be reproduced or utilized in any form without prior written authorization of FKP Architects, Inc

2 DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS - Forthcoming CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT SECTION SECTION GENERAL CONDITIONS SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES... 2 SECTION PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION... 8 SECTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES... 9 SECTION QUALITY ASSURANCE... 3 SECTION TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS... 4 SECTION COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS... 7 SECTION EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS... 4 SECTION CUTTING AND PATCHING... 6 SECTION CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES... 5 DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS SECTION SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION... 5 DIVISION (Not Used) DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION JOINT SEALANTS... 5 DIVISION 08 OPENINGS SECTION ALUMINUM FRAMES... 4 SECTION DOOR HARDWARE... 5 SECTION GLAZING... 4 DIVISION 09 - FINISHES SECTION GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES... 6 SECTION NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING... 3 SECTION ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS... 4 SECTION RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES... 3 SECTION CARPETING... 3 SECTION SOUND BARRIER MULLION TRIM... <> SECTION PAINTING... 7 DIVISION (Not Used) DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS SECTION WINDOW TREATMENT... 2 DIVISION (Not Used) END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS 95% Construction Documents

3 2013 Uniform General Conditions for University of Texas System Building Construction Contracts For use on all UT System and Institutional Construction Projects executed on or after August 23, 2013 Table of Contents Article 1. Article 2. Article 3. Article 4. Article 5. Article 6. Article 7. Article 8. Article 9. Article 10. Article 11. Article 12. Article 13. Article 14. Article 15. Article 16. Article 17. Definitions Wage Rates and Other Laws Governing Construction General Responsibilities of Owner and Contractor Historically Underutilized Business (HUB) Subcontracting Plan Bonds and Insurance Construction Documents, Coordination Documents, and Record Documents Construction Safety Quality Control Construction Schedules Payments Changes Project Completion and Acceptance Warranty and Guarantee Suspension and Termination Dispute Resolution Certification of No Asbestos Containing Material or Work Miscellaneous Issued on August 23, 2013

4 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects Article 1. Definitions Unless the context clearly requires another meaning, the following terms have the meaning assigned herein. 1.1 Application for Payment means Contractor s monthly partial invoice for payment that includes any portion of the Work that has been completed for which an invoice has not been submitted and performed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Application for Payment accurately reflects the progress of the Work, is itemized based on the Schedule of Values, bears the notarized signature of Contractor, and shall not include subcontracted items for which Contractor does not intend to pay. 1.2 Application for Final Payment means Contractor s final invoice for payment that includes any portion of the Work that has been completed for which an invoice has not been submitted, amounts owing to adjustments to the final Contract Sum resulting from approved change orders, and release of remaining Contractor s retainage. 1.3 Architect/Engineer (A/E) means a person registered as an architect pursuant to Tex. Occ. Code Ann., Chapter 1051, as a landscape architect pursuant to Tex. Occ. Code Ann., Chapter 1052, a person licensed as a professional engineer pursuant Tex. Occ. Code Ann., Chapter 1001, and/or a firm employed by Owner or Design-Build Contractor to provide professional architectural or engineering services and to exercise overall responsibility for the design of a Project or a significant portion thereof, and to perform the contract administration responsibilities set forth in the Contract. 1.4 Baseline Schedule means the initial time schedule prepared by Contractor for Owner s information and acceptance that conveys Contractor s and Subcontractors activities (including coordination and review activities required in the Contract Documents to be performed by A/E and ODR), durations, and sequence of work related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents. The schedule clearly demonstrates the critical path of activities, durations and necessary predecessor conditions that drive the end date of the schedule. The Baseline Schedule shall not exceed the time limit current under the Contract Documents. 1.5 Certificate of Final Completion means the certificate issued by A/E that documents, to the best of A/E s knowledge and understanding, Contractor s completion of all Contractor s Punchlist items and pre-final Punchlist items, final cleanup and Contractor s provision of Record Documents, operations and maintenance manuals, and all other Close-Out documents required by the Contract Documents. 1.6 Change Order means a written modification of the Contract between Owner and Contractor, signed by Owner, Contractor and A/E. 1.7 Close-out Documents mean the product brochures, submittals, product/equipment maintenance and operations instructions, manuals, and other documents/warranties, record documents, affidavit of payment, release of lien and claim, and as may be further defined, identified, and required by the Contract Documents. 1.8 Contract means the entire agreement between Owner and Contractor, including all of the Contract Documents. 1.9 Contract Date is the date when the agreement between Owner and Contractor becomes effective Contract Documents mean those documents identified as a component of the agreement (Contract) between Owner and Contractor. These may include, but are not limited to, Drawings; Specifications; these General Conditions and Owner s Special Conditions; and all pre-bid and/or pre-proposal addenda Contract Sum means the total compensation payable to Contractor for completion of the Work in 1

5 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects accordance with the terms of the Contract Contract Time means the period between the start date identified in the Notice to Proceed with construction and the Substantial Completion date identified in the Notice to Proceed or as subsequently amended by a Change Order Contractor means the individual, corporation, limited liability company, partnership, firm, or other entity contracted to perform the Work, regardless of the type of construction contract used, so that the term as used herein includes a Construction Manager-at-Risk or a Design-Build firm as well as a general or prime Contractor. The Contract Documents refer to Contractor as if singular in number Construction Documents mean the Drawings, Specifications, and other documents issued to build the Project. Construction Documents become part of the Contract Documents when listed in the Contract or any Change Order Construction Manager-at-Risk, in accordance with Tex. Educ. Code , means a sole proprietorship, partnership, corporation, or other legal entity that assumes the risk for construction, rehabilitation, alteration, or repair of a facility at the contracted price as a general contractor and provides consultation to Owner regarding construction during and after the design of the facility Date of Commencement means the date designated in the Notice to Proceed for Contractor to commence the Work Day means a calendar day unless otherwise specifically stipulated Design-Build means a project delivery method in which the detailed design and subsequent construction is provided through a single contract with a Design-Build firm; a team, partnership, or legal entity that includes design professionals and a builder. The Design-Build Project delivery shall be implemented in accordance with Tex. Educ. Code Drawings mean that product of A/E which graphically depicts the Work Final Completion means the date determined and certified by A/E and Owner on which the Work is fully and satisfactorily complete in accordance with the Contract Final Payment means the last and final monetary compensation made to Contractor for any portion of the Work that has been completed and accepted for which payment has not been made, amounts owing to adjustments to the final Contract Sum resulting from approved change orders, and release of Contractor s retainage Historically Underutilized Business (HUB) pursuant to Tex. Gov t Code, Chapter 2161, means a business that is at least 51% owned by an Asian Pacific American, a Black American, a Hispanic American, a Native American and/or an American Woman; is an entity with its principal place of business in Texas; and has an owner residing in Texas with proportionate interest that actively participates in the control, operations, and management of the entity s affairs Notice to Proceed means written document informing Contractor of the dates beginning Work and the dates anticipated for Substantial Completion Open Item List means a list of work activities, Punchlist items, changes or other issues that are not expected by Owner and Contractor to be complete prior to Substantial Completion Owner means the State of Texas, and any agency of the State of Texas, acting through the responsible entity of the State of Texas identified in the Contract as Owner Owner s Designated Representative (ODR) means the individual assigned by Owner to act on its 2

6 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects behalf and to undertake certain activities as specifically outlined in the Contract. ODR is the only party authorized to direct changes to the scope, cost, or time of the Contract Owner s Special Conditions mean the documents containing terms and conditions which may be unique to the Project. Owner s Special Conditions are a part of the Contract Documents and have precedence over the Uniform General Conditions 1.28 Project means all activities necessary for realization Owner s desired building or other structure including all ancillary and related work. This includes design, contract award(s), execution of the Work itself, work by Owner s forces and/or other contractors and fulfillment of all Contract and warranty obligations Progress Assessment Report (PAR) means the monthly compliance report to Owner verifying compliance with the HUB subcontracting plan (HSP) Proposed Change Order (PCO) means a document that informs Contractor of a proposed change in the Work and appropriately describes or otherwise documents such change including Contractor s response of pricing for the proposed change Punchlist means a list of items of Work to be completed or corrected by Contractor before Final Completion. Punchlists indicate items to be finished, remaining Work to be performed, or Work that does not meet quality or quantity requirements as required in the Contract Documents Record Documents mean the drawing set, Specifications, and other materials maintained by Contractor that documents all addenda, Architect s Supplemental Instructions, Change Orders and postings and markings that record the as-constructed conditions of the Work and all changes made during construction Request for Information (RFI) means a written request by Contractor directed to A/E or ODR for a clarification of the information provided in the Contract Documents or for direction concerning information necessary to perform the Work that may be omitted from the Contract Documents Samples mean representative physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship used to confirm compliance with requirements and/or to establish standards for use in execution of the Work Schedule of Values means the detailed breakdown of the cost of the materials, labor, and equipment necessary to accomplish the Work as described in the Contract Documents, submitted by Contractor for approval by Owner and A/E Shop Drawings mean the drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, performance charts, brochures, and other data prepared by Contractor or its agents which detail a portion of the Work Site means the geographical area of the location of the Work Specifications mean the written product of A/E that establishes the quality and/or performance of products utilized in the Work and processes to be used, including testing and verification for producing the Work Subcontractor means a business entity that enters into an agreement with Contractor to perform part of the Work or to provide services, materials, or equipment for use in the Work Submittal Register means a list provided by Contractor of all items to be furnished for review and approval by A/E and Owner and as identified in the Contract Documents including anticipated sequence and submittal dates Substantial Completion means the date determined and certified by Contractor, A/E, and Owner when 3

7 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects the Work, or a designated portion thereof, is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract, so as to be operational and fit for the use intended Unit Price Work means the Work, or a portion of the Work, paid for based on incremental units of measurement Unilateral Change Order (ULCO) means a Change Order issued by Owner without the complete agreement of Contractor, as to cost and/or time Work means the administration, procurement, materials, equipment, construction and all services necessary for Contractor, and/or its agents, to fulfill Contractor s obligations under the Contract Work Progress Schedule means the continually updated time schedule prepared and monitored by Contractor that accurately indicates all necessary appropriate revisions as required by the conditions of the Work and the Project while maintaining a concise comparison to the Baseline Schedule. Article 2. Wage Rates and Other Laws Governing Construction 2.1 Environmental Regulations. Contractor shall conduct activities in compliance with applicable laws and regulations and other requirements of the Contract relating to the environment and its protection at all times. Unless otherwise specifically determined, Owner is responsible for obtaining and maintaining permits related to stormwater run-off. Contractor shall conduct operations consistent with stormwater run-off permit conditions. Contractor is responsible for all items it brings to the Site, including hazardous materials, and all such items brought to the Site by its Subcontractors and suppliers, or by other entities subject to direction of Contractor. Contractor shall not incorporate hazardous materials into the Work without prior approval of Owner, and shall provide an affidavit attesting to such in association with request for Substantial Completion inspection. 2.2 Wage Rates. Contractor shall not pay less than the wage scale of the various classes of labor as shown on the prevailing wage schedule provided by Owner in the bid or proposal specifications. The specified wage rates are minimum rates only. Owner is not bound to pay any claims for additional compensation made by any Contractor because the Contractor pays wages in excess of the applicable minimum rate contained in the Contract. The prevailing wage schedule is not a representation that qualified labor adequate to perform the Work is available locally at the prevailing wage rates Notification to Workers. Contractor shall post the prevailing wage schedule in a place conspicuous to all workers on the Project Site and shall notify each worker, in writing, of the following as they commence work on the Contract: the worker s job classification, the established minimum wage rate requirement for that classification, as well as the worker s actual wage. The notice must be delivered to and signed in acknowledgement of receipt by the worker and must list both the wages and fringe benefits to be paid or furnished for each classification in which the worker is assigned duties. When requested by Owner, Contractor shall furnish evidence of compliance with the Texas Prevailing Wage Law and the addresses of all workers Contractor shall submit a copy of each worker s wage-rate notification to ODR with the application for progress payment for the period during which the worker was engaged in activities on behalf of the Project The prevailing wage schedule is determined by Owner in compliance with Tex. Gov t Code, Chapter Should Contractor at any time become aware that a particular skill or trade not reflected on Owner s prevailing wage schedule will be or is being employed in the Work, whether by Contractor or by Subcontractor, Contractor shall promptly inform ODR of the proposed wage to be paid for the skill along with a justification for same and ODR shall promptly concur with or reject the proposed wage and classification. Contractor is responsible for 4

8 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects determining the most appropriate wage for a particular skill in relation to similar skills or trades identified on the prevailing wage schedule. In no case, shall any worker be paid less than the wage indicated for laborers Penalty for Violation. Contractor, and any Subcontractor, will pay to the State a penalty of sixty dollars ($60) for each worker employed for each day, or portion thereof, that the worker is paid less than the wage rates stipulated in the prevailing wage schedule Complaints of Violations Owner s Determination of Good Cause. Upon receipt of information concerning a violation, Owner will conduct an investigation in accordance with Tex. Gov t Code, Chapter 2258 and make an initial determination as to whether good cause exists that a violation occurred. Upon making a good cause finding, Owner will retain the full amounts claimed by the claimant or claimants as the difference between wages paid and wages due under the prevailing wage schedule and any supplements thereto, together with the applicable penalties, such amounts being subtracted from successive progress payments pending a final decision on the violation No Extension of Time. If Owner s determination proves valid that good cause existed to believe a violation had occurred, Contractor is not entitled to an extension of time for any delay arising directly or indirectly from the arbitration procedures. 2.3 Venue for Suits. The venue for any suit arising from the Contract will be in a court of competent jurisdiction in Travis County, Texas, or as may otherwise be designated in the Owner s Special Conditions. 2.4 Licensing of Trades. Contractor shall comply with all applicable provisions of State law related to license requirements for skilled tradesmen, contractors, suppliers and or laborers, as necessary to accomplish the Work. In the event Contractor, or one of its Subcontractors, loses its license during the term of performance of the Contract, Contractor shall promptly hire or contract with a licensed provider of the service at no additional cost to Owner. 2.5 Royalties, Patents, and Copyrights. Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights, and shall hold Owner harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents, or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications or other documents prepared by Owner or A/E. However, if Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process, or product is an infringement of a copyright or a patent, Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to A/E. 2.6 State Sales and Use Taxes. Owner qualifies for exemption from certain State and local sales and use taxes pursuant to the provisions of Tex. Tax Code, Chapter 151. Upon request from Contractor, Owner shall furnish evidence of tax exempt status. Contractor may claim exemption from payment of certain applicable State taxes by complying with such procedures as prescribed by the State Comptroller of Public Accounts. Owner acknowledges not all items qualify for exemption. Owner is not obligated to reimburse Contractor for taxes paid on items that qualify for tax exemption. Article 3. General Responsibilities of Owner and Contractor 3.1 Owner s General Responsibilities. Owner is the entity identified as such in the Contract and referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. 5

9 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects Preconstruction Conference. Prior to, or concurrent with, the issuance of Notice to Proceed with construction, a conference will be convened for attendance by Owner, Contractor, A/E and appropriate Subcontractors. The purpose of the conference is to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work, the operational conditions at the Project Site, and general administration of the Project. Topics include communications, schedules, procedures for handling Shop Drawings and other submittals, processing Applications for Payment, maintaining required records and all other matters of importance to the administration of the Project and effective communications between the Project team members Owner s Designated Representative. Prior to the start of construction, Owner will identify Owner s Designated Representative (ODR), who has the express authority to act and bind Owner to the extent and for the purposes described in the various Articles of the Contract, including responsibilities for general administration of the Contract Unless otherwise specifically defined elsewhere in the Contract Documents, ODR is the single point of contact between Owner and Contractor. Notice to ODR, unless otherwise noted, constitutes notice to Owner under the Contract All directives on behalf of Owner will be conveyed to Contractor and A/E by ODR in writing Owner will furnish or cause to be furnished, free of charge, the number of complete sets of the Drawings, Specifications, and addenda as provided in the Agreement or Owner s Special Conditions Owner Supplied Materials and Information Owner will furnish to Contractor those surveys describing the physical characteristics, legal description, limitations of the Site, Site utility locations, and other information used in the preparation of the Contract Documents Owner will provide information, equipment, or services under Owner s control to Contractor with reasonable promptness Availability of Lands. Owner will furnish, as indicated in the Contract, all required rights to use the lands upon which the Work occurs. This includes rights-of-way and easements for access and such other lands that are designated for use by Contractor. Contractor shall comply with all Owner identified encumbrances or restrictions specifically related to use of lands so furnished. Owner will obtain and pay for easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities, unless otherwise required in the Contract Documents Limitation on Owner s Duties Owner will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor s means, methods, technologies, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto. Owner is not responsible for any failure of Contractor to comply with laws and regulations applicable to the Work. Owner is not responsible for the failure of Contractor to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Except as provided in Section 2.5, Owner is not responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor, or any of its Subcontractors, suppliers or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the Work on behalf of Contractor Owner will not take any action in contravention of a design decision made by A/E in preparation of the Contract Documents, when such actions are in conflict with 6

10 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects statutes under which A/E is licensed for the protection of the public health and safety. 3.2 Role of Architect/Engineer. Unless specified otherwise in the Contract between Owner and Contractor, A/E shall provide general administration services for Owner during the construction phase of the project. Written correspondence, requests for information, and Shop Drawings/submittals shall be directed to A/E for action. A/E has the authority to act on behalf of Owner to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified by written instrument, which will be furnished to Contractor by ODR, upon request Site Visits A/E will make visits to the Site at intervals as provided in the A/E s Contract with Owner, to observe the progress and the quality of the various aspects of Contractor s executed Work and report findings to Owner A/E has the authority to interpret Contract Documents and inspect the Work for compliance and conformance with the Contract. Except as referenced in Paragraph , Owner retains the sole authority to accept or reject Work and issue direction for correction, removal, or replacement of Work Clarifications and Interpretations. It may be determined that clarifications or interpretations of the Contract Documents are necessary. Upon direction by ODR, such clarifications or interpretations will be provided by A/E consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. A/E will issue these clarifications with reasonable promptness to Contractor as A/E s supplemental instruction ( ASI ) or similar instrument. If Contractor believes that such clarification or interpretation justifies an adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, Contractor shall so notify Owner in accordance with the provisions of Article Limitations on Architect/Engineer Authority. A/E is not responsible for: Contractor s means, methods, techniques, sequences, procedures, safety, or programs incident to the Project, nor will A/E supervise, direct, control or have authority over the same; The failure of Contractor to comply with laws and regulations applicable to the furnishing or performing the Work; Contractor s failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; or Acts or omissions of Contractor, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the Work. 3.3 Contractor s General Responsibilities. Contractor is solely responsible for implementing the Work in full compliance with all applicable laws and the Contract Documents and shall supervise and direct the Work using the best skill and attention to assure that each element of the Work conforms to the Contract requirements. Contractor is solely responsible for all construction means, methods, techniques, safety, sequences, coordination and procedures. Contractor shall visit the Site before commencing the Work and become familiar with local conditions such as the location, accessibility and general character of the Site and/or building Project Administration. Contractor shall provide Project administration for all Subcontractors, vendors, suppliers, and others involved in implementing the Work and shall coordinate administration efforts with those of A/E and ODR in accordance with these general 7

11 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects conditions, Division 1 of the Specifications and other provisions of the Contract, and as outlined in the pre-construction conference At the request of Owner and at no additional cost, Contractor shall furnish to the ODR one copy of the current edition of the RSMeans Facilities Construction Cost Data Book in hard copy format or digital medium as directed by the ODR Contractor s Management Personnel. Contractor shall employ a competent person or persons who will be present at the Project Site during the progress of the Work to supervise or oversee the work. The competent persons are subject to the approval of ODR. Contractor shall not change approved staff during the course of the project without the written approval of ODR unless the staff member leaves the employment of Contractor. Contractor shall provide additional quality control, safety and other staff as stated in the Contract Documents Labor. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay-out, and construct the Work as required by the Contract Documents and maintain good discipline and order at the Site at all times Services, Materials, and Equipment. Unless otherwise specified, Contractor shall provide and assume full responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities, incidentals, and services necessary for the construction, performance, testing, start-up, inspection and completion of the Work Contractor General Responsibility. For Owner furnished equipment or material that will be in the care, custody, and control of Contractor, Contractor is responsible for damage or loss Non-Compliant Work. Should A/E and/or ODR identify Work as non-compliant with the Contract Documents, A/E and/or ODR shall communicate the finding to Contractor, and Contractor shall correct such Work at no additional cost to the Owner. The approval of Work or the failure to find non-compliant Work by either A/E or ODR does not relieve Contractor from the obligation to comply with all requirements of the Contract Documents Subcontractors. Contractor shall not employ any Subcontractor, supplier or other person or organization, whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner shall have reasonable objection. Owner will communicate such objections in writing within ten (10) days of receipt of Contractor s intent to use such Subcontractor, supplier, or other person or organization. Contractor is not required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier or other person or organization to furnish any of the work to whom Contractor has reasonable objection. Contractor shall not substitute Subcontractors without the acceptance of Owner All Subcontracts and supply contracts shall be consistent with and bind the Subcontractors and suppliers to the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents including provisions of the Contract between Contractor and Owner Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the Work of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Require all Subcontractors, suppliers and such other persons and organizations performing or furnishing any of the Work to communicate with Owner only through Contractor. Contractor shall furnish to Owner a copy, at Owner s request, of each first-tier subcontract promptly after its execution. Contractor agrees that Owner has no obligation to review or approve the content of such contracts and that providing Owner such copies in no way relieves Contractor of any of the terms and conditions of the Contract, including, without limitation, any provisions 8

12 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects of the Contract which require the Subcontractor to be bound to Contractor in the same manner in which Contractor is bound to Owner Continuing the Work. Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes, disagreements, or alternative resolution processes with Owner. Contractor shall not delay or postpone any Work because of pending unresolved disputes, disagreements or alternative resolution processes, except as Owner and Contractor may agree in writing Cleaning. Contractor shall at all times, keep the Site and the Work clean and free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by the construction activities under the Contract. Contractor shall ensure that the entire Project is thoroughly cleaned prior to requesting Substantial Completion inspection and, again, upon completion of the Project prior to the final inspection Acts and Omissions of Contractor, its Subcontractors and Employees. Contractor shall be responsible for acts and omissions of his employees and all its Subcontractors, their agents and employees. Owner may, in writing, require Contractor to remove from the Project any of Contractor s or its Subcontractor s employees whom ODR finds to be careless, incompetent, unsafe, uncooperative, disruptive, or otherwise objectionable Ancillary Areas. Contractor shall operate and maintain operations and associated storage areas at the site of the Work in accordance with the following: All Contractor operations, including storage of materials and employee parking upon the Site of Work, shall be confined to areas designated by Owner Contractor may erect, at its own expense, temporary buildings that will remain its property. Contractor shall remove such buildings and associated utility service lines upon completion of the Work, unless Contractor requests and Owner provides written consent that it may abandon such buildings and utilities in place Contractor shall use only established roadways or construct and use such temporary roadways as may be authorized by Owner. Contractor shall not allow load limits of vehicles to exceed the limits prescribed by appropriate regulations or law. Contractor shall provide protection to road surfaces, curbs, sidewalks, trees, shrubbery, sprinkler systems, drainage structures and other like existing improvements to prevent damage and repair any damage thereto at the expense of Contractor Owner may restrict Contractor s entry to the Site to specifically assigned entrances and routes Separate Contracts. Owner reserves the right to award other contracts in connection with the Project under the same or substantially similar contract terms, including those portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. Owner reserves the right to perform operations related to the Project with Owner s own forces Under a system of separate contracts, the conditions described herein continue to apply except as may be amended by change order Contractor shall cooperate with other contractors or forces employed on the Project by Owner, including providing access to Site, integration of activities within Contractor s Work Progress Schedule and Project information as requested Owner shall be reimbursed by Contractor for costs incurred by Owner which are payable to a separate contractor because of delays, improperly timed activities, or defective construction 9

13 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects by Contractor. Owner will equitably adjust the Contract by Change Order for costs incurred by Contractor because of delays, improperly timed activities, damage to the Work or defective construction by a separate contractor. 3.4 Indemnification of Owner Contractor covenants and agrees to FULLY INDEMNIFY and HOLD HARMLESS, Owner and the elected and appointed officials, employees, officers, directors, volunteers, and representatives of Owner, individually or collectively, from and against any and all costs, claims, liens, damages, losses, expenses, fees, fines, penalties, proceedings, actions, demands, causes of action, liability and suits of any kind and nature, including but not limited to, personal or bodily injury, death or property damage, made upon Owner directly or indirectly arising out of, resulting from or related to Contractor s activities under this Contract, including any acts or omissions of Contractor, or any agent, officer, director, representative, employee, consultant or the Subcontractor of Contractor, and their respective officers, agents, employees, directors and representatives while in the exercise of performance of the rights or duties under this Contract. The indemnity provided for in this paragraph does not apply to any liability resulting from the negligence of the Owner, its officers or employees, separate contractors or assigned contractors, in instances where such negligence causes personal injury, death or property damage. IN THE EVENT CONTRACTOR AND OWNER ARE FOUND JOINTLY LIABLE BY A COURT OF COMPETENT JURISDICTION, LIABILITY WILL BE APPORTIONED COMPARATIVELY IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF TEXAS, WITHOUT WAIVING ANY GOVERNMENTAL IMMUNITY AVAILABLE TO THE STATE UNDER TEXAS LAW AND WITHOUT WAIVING ANY DEFENSES OF THE PARTIES UNDER TEXAS LAW Contractor shall protect and indemnify the Owner from and against all claims, damages, judgments and losses arising from infringement or alleged infringement of any United States patent, or copyright that arise out of any of the work performed by the Contractor or the use by Contractor, or by Owner at the direction of Contractor, of any article or material. Upon becoming aware of a suit or threat of suit for patent or copyright infringement, Owner shall promptly notify Contractor and Contractor shall be given full opportunity to negotiate a settlement. Contractor does not warrant against infringement by reason of Owner's or Project Architect s design of articles or their use in combination with other materials or in the operation of any process. In the event of litigation, Owner agrees to cooperate reasonably with Contractor and parties shall be entitled, in connection with any such litigation, to be represented by counsel at their own expense The provisions of this indemnification are solely for the benefit of the parties hereto and not intended to create or grant any rights, contractual or otherwise, to any other person or entity Contractor shall promptly advise Owner in writing of any claim or demand against Owner or against Contractor which involves Owner and known to Contractor and related to or arising out of Contractor s activities under this Contract These indemnitie provisions shall survive the termination of this Agreement regardless of the reason for termination. Article 4. Historically Underutilized Business (HUB) Subcontracting Plan 4.1 General Description. The purpose of the Historically Underutilized Business (HUB) program is to promote equal business opportunities for economically disadvantaged persons (as defined by Tex. Gov t Code, Chapter 2161) to contract with the State of Texas in accordance with the goals specified 10

14 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects in the State of Texas Disparity Study. The HUB program annual procurement utilization goals are defined in 34 T.A.C (b) State agencies are required by statute to make a good faith effort to assist HUBs in participating in contract awards issued by the State. 34 T.A.C (b) outlines the State s policy to encourage the utilization of HUBs in State contracting opportunities through race, ethnic and gender neutral means A Contractor who contracts with the State in an amount of $100,000 or greater is required to make a good faith effort to award subcontracts to HUBs in accordance with 34 T.A.C (a)(2)(A) by submitting a HUB subcontracting plan within twenty-four (24) hours after the bid or response is due and complying with the HUB subcontracting plan after it is accepted by Owner and during the term of the Contract. 4.2 Compliance with Approved HUB Subcontracting Plan. Contractor, having been awarded this Contract in part by complying with the HUB program statute and rules, hereby covenants to continue to comply with the HUB program as follows: Prior to adding or substituting a Subcontractor, promptly notify Owner in the event a change is required for any reason to the accepted HUB subcontracting plan Conduct the good-faith effort activities required and provide Owner with necessary documentation to justify approval of a change to the approved HUB subcontracting plan Cooperate in the execution of a Change Order or such other approval of the change in the HUB subcontracting plans as Contractor and Owner may agree to Maintain and make available to Owner upon request business records documenting compliance with the accepted HUB subcontracting plan Upon receipt of payment for performance of Work, submit to Owner a compliance report, in the format required by Owner that demonstrates Contractor s performance of the HUB subcontracting plan Progress Assessment Report (PAR): monthly compliance reports to Owner (contracting agency), verifying their compliance with the HUB subcontracting plan, including the use/expenditures they have made to Subcontractors. (The PAR is available at Promptly and accurately explain and provide supplemental information to Owner to assist in Owner s investigation of Contractor s good-faith effort to fulfill the HUB subcontracting plan and the requirements under 34 T.A.C (a)(1). 4.3 Failure to Demonstrate Good-Faith Effort. Upon a determination by Owner that Contractor has failed to demonstrate a good-faith effort to fulfill the HUB subcontracting plan or any Contract covenant detailed above, Owner may, in addition to all other remedies available to it, report the failure to perform to the Comptroller of Public Accounts, Texas Procurement and Support Services Division, Historically Underutilized Business Program and may bar Contractor from future contracting opportunities with Owner. Article 5. Bonds and Insurance 5.1 Construction Bonds. Contractor is required to tender to Owner, prior to commencing the Work, performance and payment bonds, as required by Tex. Gov t Code, Chapter On Construction Manager-at-Risk and Design-Build Projects the Owner shall require a security bond, as described in 11

15 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects Subsection below Bond Requirements. Each bond shall be executed by a corporate surety or sureties authorized to do business in the State of Texas and acceptable to Owner, on Owner s form, and in compliance with the relevant provisions of the Texas Insurance Code. If any bond is for more than ten (10) percent of the surety s capital and surplus, Owner may require certification that the company has reinsured the excess portion with one or more reinsurers authorized to do business in the State. A reinsurer may not reinsure for more than ten (10) percent of its capital and surplus. If a surety upon a bond loses its authority to do business in the State, Contractor shall, within thirty (30) days after such loss, furnish a replacement bond at no added cost to Owner A Performance bond is required if the Contract Sum is in excess of $100,000. The performance bond is solely for the protection of Owner. The performance bond is to be for the Contract Sum to guarantee the faithful performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The form of the bond shall be approved by the Office of the Attorney General of Texas. The performance bond shall be effective through Contractor s warranty period A Payment bond is required if the Contract price is in excess of $25,000. The payment bond is to be for the Contract Sum and is payable to Owner solely for the protection and use of payment bond beneficiaries. The form of the bond shall be approved by the Office of the Attorney General of Texas Security Bond. The security bond provides protection to Owner if Contractor presents an acceptable guaranteed maximum price ( GMP ) to Owner but is unable to deliver the required payment and performance bonds within the time period stated below When Bonds Are Due Security bonds are due before execution of a Construction Manager-at-Risk or Design-Build Contract Payment and performance bonds are due before execution of a contract on competitively bid or competitively sealed proposal projects or before execution of a GMP proposal on Construction Manager-at-Risk projects or Design-Build projects Power of Attorney. Each bond shall be accompanied by a valid power of attorney (issued by the surety company and attached, signed and sealed with the corporate embossed seal, to the bond) authorizing the attorney-in-fact who signs the bond to commit the company to the terms of the bond, and stating any limit in the amount for which the attorney can issue a single bond Bond Indemnification. The process of requiring and accepting bonds and making claims thereunder shall be conducted in compliance with Tex. Gov t Code, Chapter IF FOR ANY REASON A STATUTORY PAYMENT OR PERFORMANCE BOND IS NOT HONORED BY THE SURETY, CONTRACTOR SHALL FULLY INDEMNIFY AND HOLD OWNER HARMLESS OF AND FROM ANY COSTS, LOSSES, OBLIGATIONS OR LIABILITIES IT INCURS AS A RESULT Furnishing Bond Information. Owner shall furnish certified copies of the payment bond and the related Contract to any qualified person seeking copies who complies with Tex. Gov t Code Claims on Payment Bonds. Claims on payment bonds must be sent directly to Contractor and 12

16 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects his surety in accordance with Tex. Gov t Code All payment bond claimants are cautioned that no lien exists on the funds unpaid to Contractor on such Contract, and that reliance on notices sent to Owner may result in loss of their rights against Contractor and/or his surety. Owner is not responsible in any manner to a claimant for collection of unpaid bills, and accepts no such responsibility because of any representation by any agent or employee Payment Claims when Payment Bond not Required. The rights of Subcontractors regarding payment are governed by Tex. Prop. Code when the value of the Contract between Owner and Contractor is less than $25, These provisions set out the requirements for filing a valid lien on funds unpaid to Contractor as of the time of filing the claim, actions necessary to release the lien and satisfaction of such claim Sureties. A surety shall be listed on the US Department of the Treasury s Listing of Approved Sureties maintained by the Bureau of Financial Management Service (FMS), stating companies holding Certificates of Authority as acceptable sureties on Federal bonds and acceptable reinsuring companies (FMS Circular 570). 5.2 Insurance Requirements. Contractor shall carry insurance in the types and amounts indicated in this Article for the duration of the Contract. The required insurance shall include coverage for Owner s property prior to construction, during construction and during the warranty period. The insurance shall be evidenced by delivery to Owner of certificates of insurance executed by the insurer or its authorized agent stating coverages, limits, expiration dates and compliance with all applicable required provisions. Upon request, Owner, and/or its agents, shall be entitled to receive without expense, copies of the policies and all endorsements. Contractor shall update all expired policies prior to submission for monthly payment. Failure to update policies shall be reason for withholding of payment until renewal is provided to Owner Contractor, consistent with its status as an independent contractor, shall provide and maintain all insurance coverage with the minimum amounts described below until the end of the warranty period unless otherwise stated in Owner s Special Conditions. Failure to maintain insurance coverage, as required, is grounds for suspension of Work for cause pursuant to Article 14. The Contractor will be notified of the date on which the Builder s Risk insurance policy may be terminated by any means deemed appropriate by Owner Coverage shall be written on an occurrence basis by companies authorized and admitted to do business in the State of Texas and rated A-, VII or better by A.M. Best Company or similar rating company or otherwise acceptable to Owner Insurance Coverage Required Workers Compensation. Insurance with limits as required by the Texas Workers Compensation Act and Employer s Liability Insurance with limits of not less than: $1,000,000 each accident; $1,000,000 disease each employee ; and $1,000,000 disease policy limit. Policies must include (a) Other States Endorsement to include TEXAS if business is domiciled outside the State of Texas, and (b) a waiver of all rights of subrogation in favor of Owner Commercial General Liability Insurance, including premises, 13

17 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects operations, independent contractor s liability, products and completed operations and contractual liability, covering, but not limited to, the liability assumed under the indemnification provisions of this Contract, fully insuring Contractor s (or Subcontractor s) liability for bodily injury (including death) and property damage with a minimum limit of: $1,000,000 per occurrence; $2,000,000 general aggregate; $2,000,000 products and completed operations aggregate; and Coverage shall be on an occurrence basis. The policy shall include coverage extended to apply to completed operations and explosion, collapse, and underground hazards. The policy shall include endorsement CG2503 Amendment of Aggregate Limits of Insurance (per Project) or its equivalent. If the Work involves any activities within fifty (50) feet of any railroad, railroad protective insurance as may be required by the affected railroad, written for not less than the limits required by such railroad Asbestos Abatement Liability Insurance, including coverage for liability arising from the encapsulation, removal, handling, storage, transportation, and disposal of asbestos containing materials. *This requirement applies if the Work or the Project includes asbestos containing materials. The combined single limit for bodily injury and property damage will be a minimum of $1,000,000 per occurrence. *Specific requirement for claims-made form: Required period of coverage will be determined by the following formula: continuous coverage for life of the Contract, plus one (1) year (to provide coverage for the warranty period), and an extended discovery period for a minimum of five (5) years which shall begin at the end of the warranty period. Employer s liability limits for asbestos abatement will be: $1,000,000 each accident; $1,000,000 disease each employee; and $1,000,000 disease policy limit. If this Contract is for asbestos abatement only, the All-Risk Builder s Risk or all-risk installation floater ( e) is not required Business Automobile Liability Insurance, covering all owned, hired, and non-owned vehicles, with a minimum combined single limit for bodily injury (including death) and property damage of $1,000,000 14

18 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects per occurrence. No aggregate shall be permitted for this type of coverage. Such insurance is to include coverage for loading and unloading hazards. Contractor or any subcontractor responsible for transporting asbestos or other hazardous materials defined as asbestos shall provide pollution coverage for any vehicle hauling asbestos containing cargo. The policy must include a MCS 90 endorsement with a $5,000,000 limit and the CA 9948 Pollution Endorsement, or its equivalent All-Risk Builder s Risk Insurance, if applicable (or all-risk installation floater for instances in which the project involves solely the installation of material and/or equipment). Coverage is determined by the Contract Sum, as detailed, below. BUILDERS RISK REQUIREMENT FOR PROJECTS WITH A CONTRACT SUM <$20 MILLION Contractor shall purchase and maintain in force builders risk insurance on the entire Work. Such insurance shall be written in the amount of the original contract, plus any subsequent change orders and plus the cost of materials supplied or installed by others, comprising Total Value for the entire Project at the site. The insurance shall apply on a replacement cost basis with no coinsurance provision. A sublimit may be applicable to flood coverage, but sublimit must be at least 20% of the Total Value of the Project. The limit for all other perils, including Named Windstorm, Wind, and Hail, must be equal to the Total Value for the entire Project at the site. (If Installation Floater, limit shall be equal to 100 percent of the contract cost.) This insurance shall name as insureds the Owner, the Contractor, and all subcontractors and subsubcontractors in the Work Builders risk insurance shall be on an all risk or equivalent policy form and shall include, without limitation, insurance against fire and extended coverage perils, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, earthquake, flood, windstorm, boiler and machinery/mechanical breakdown, testing and startup, and terrorism This insurance shall cover the entire work at the site as required in , including, but not limited to, the following: Temporary works including but not limited to scaffolding, form work, fences, shoring, hoarding, falsework and temporary buildings Offsite Storage Portions of the work in transit Debris removal Extra Expense Expediting Expenses Demolition and Increased Cost of Construction Pollutant Clean-Up and Removal Trees, Shrubs, Plants, Lawns and Landscaping (if applicable) Errors & Omissions (applicable to purchase of Builders Risk policy only) This insurance shall not contain an occupancy clause suspending or reducing coverage should the Owner occupy, or begin beneficial occupancy before the Owner has accepted final completion This insurance shall be specific as to coverage and shall be primary to any permanent insurance or self-insurance that may be maintained on the property by Owner. 15

19 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects This insurance shall include a waiver of subrogation in favor of Owner, the Contractor, and all subcontractors and sub-subcontractors in the work As applicable, Flood deductible shall not exceed $250,000 for Zone A, $100,000 for Zone B and $50,000 for all other Zones. For Tier 1 and Tier 2, Named Windstorm deductible shall not exceed 2% of the project values in place at the time of the loss Before the commencement of the work, Contractor shall provide to Owner an accurate certificate of insurance that provides specific evidence of all requirements outlined in Section A copy of the policy itself shall be provided to Owner within 30 days after Notice to Proceed Refer to Owner s Special Conditions for possible additional Builders Risk insurance requirements. BUILDERS RISK REQUIREMENT FOR PROJECTS WITH A CONTRACT SUM $20 MILLION Contractor shall purchase and maintain in force builders risk insurance on the entire Work. Such insurance shall be written in the amount of the original contract, plus any subsequent change orders and plus the cost of materials supplied or installed by others, comprising Total Value for the entire Project at the site. The insurance shall apply on a replacement cost basis with no coinsurance provision and shall include a margin clause of plus/minus 10% on project value. A sublimit may be applicable to flood coverage, but sublimit must be at least 20% of the Total Value of the Project. A sublimit of $50 million or the Total Value of the Project, whichever is less, is acceptable for Earthquake. The limit for all other perils, including Named Windstorm, Wind, and Hail, must be equal to the Total Value for the entire Project at the site. (If Installation Floater, limit shall be equal to 100 percent of the contract cost.) This insurance shall name as insureds the Owner, the Contractor, and all subcontractors and subsubcontractors in the Work Builders risk insurance shall be on an all risk or equivalent policy form and shall include, without limitation, insurance against fire and extended coverage perils, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, earthquake, flood, windstorm, boiler and machinery/mechanical breakdown, testing and startup, and terrorism This insurance shall cover the entire work at the site as required in , including, but not limited to, the following: Coverage Minimum Limit Required Temporary works including but not limited to $1 million scaffolding, form work, fences, shoring, hoarding, falsework and temporary buildings Offsite Storage Sufficient to cover the anticipated maximum values stored offsite Portions of the work in Transit Sufficient to cover the anticipated maximum values in transit Debris Removal 25% of Physical damage amount subject to maximum of $5 million or 25% of Total Value of Project whichever is higher Expediting Expenses $1 million Extra Expense $5 million Demolition and Increased Cost of Construction $2 million or 10% of Total Value of Project whichever is higher Pollutant Clean-Up and Removal $250,000 Trees, Shrubs, Plants, Lawns and Landscaping (if $2,500 per item subject to a maximum of $1 million applicable) 16

20 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects Errors & Omissions (applicable to purchase of Builders Risk policy only) $2.5 million This insurance shall not contain an occupancy clause suspending or reducing coverage should the Owner occupy, or begin beneficial occupancy before the Owner has accepted final completion This insurance shall be specific as to coverage and shall be primary to any permanent insurance or self-insurance that may be maintained on the property by Owner This insurance shall include a waiver of subrogation in favor of Owner, the Contractor, and all subcontractors and sub-subcontractors in the work As applicable, Flood deductible shall not exceed $250,000 for Zone A, $100,000 for Zone B and $50,000 for all other Zones. For Tier 1 and Tier 2, Named Windstorm deductible shall not exceed 2% of the project values in place at the time of the loss Before the commencement of the work, Contractor shall provide to Owner an accurate certificate of insurance that provides specific evidence of all requirements outlined in Section A copy of the policy itself shall be provided to Owner within 30 days after Notice to Proceed Refer to Owner s Special Conditions for possible additional Builders Risk insurance requirements Umbrella Liability Insurance. On Projects that are not insured under the Owner s Revolving Owner Controlled Insurance Program (ROCIP) or any project requiring demolition services, Contractor shall obtain, pay for and maintain umbrella liability insurance during the Contract term, insuring Contractor (or Subcontractor) that provides coverage at least as broad as and applies in excess and follows form of the primary liability coverages required above. The policy shall provide drop down coverage where underlying primary insurance coverage limits are insufficient or exhausted Umbrella Liability Insurance coverage shall be in the following amounts: If Contract sum is $1,000,000 or less: No Umbrella Required If Contract Sum is greater than $1,000,000 up to $3,000,000: $1,000,000 each occurrence and $2,000,000 annual aggregate If Contract Sum is greater than $3,000,000 up to $5,000,000: $5,000,000 each occurrence and $5,000,000 annual aggregate If Contract Sum is greater than $5,000,000: $10,000,000 each occurrence and $10,000,000 annual aggregate All Policies must include the following clauses, as applicable: Contractor must provide to Owner immediate notice of cancellation, material change, or non-renewal to any insurance coverages required herein above. This requirement may be satisfied by the Contractor providing a copy of the notice received by the insurer to Owner within two business days of date of receipt or by Endorsement of the policies that require Insurer to provide notice to Owner It is agreed that Contractor s insurance shall be deemed primary with respect to any insurance or self insurance carried by Owner for liability arising out of operations under the Contract with Owner. 17

21 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects Owner, its officials, directors, employees, representatives, and volunteers are added as additional insureds as respects operations and activities of, or on behalf of the named insured performed under Contract with Owner. The additional insured status must cover completed operations as well. This is not applicable to workers compensation policies A waiver of subrogation in favor of Owner shall be provided in all policies If Owner is damaged by the failure of Contractor (or Subcontractor) to maintain insurance as required herein and/or as further described in Owner s Special Conditions, then Contractor shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable to that failure Without limiting any of the other obligations or liabilities of Contractor, Contractor shall require each Subcontractor performing work under the Contract, at Subcontractor s own expense, to maintain during the term of the Contract, the same stipulated minimum insurance including the required provisions and additional policy conditions as shown above. As an alternative, Contractor may include its Subcontractors as additional insureds on its own coverage as prescribed under these requirements. Contractor s certificate of insurance shall note in such event that Subcontractors are included as additional insureds and that Contractor agrees to provide workers compensation for Subcontractors and their employees. Contractor shall obtain and monitor the certificates of insurance from each Subcontractor in order to assure compliance with the insurance requirements. Contractor must retain the certificates of insurance for the duration of the Contract plus five (5) years and shall have the responsibility of enforcing these insurance requirements among its Subcontractors. Owner shall be entitled, upon request and without expense, to receive copies of these certificates Workers compensation insurance coverage must meet the statutory requirements of Tex. Lab. Code (44) and specific to construction projects for public entities as required by Tex. Lab. Code Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate")- A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (DWC-81, DWC-82, DWC-83, or DWC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in ) includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner-operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 18

22 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects The contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section (44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract If the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended The contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (2) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project The contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter The contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project The contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Depart of Insurance Division of Workers' Compensation, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage The contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (1) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section (44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (2) provide to the contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (3) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (4) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and 19

23 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects (b) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (7) contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (1) - (7), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a selfinsured, with the commission's Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions The contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. Article 6. Construction Documents, Coordination Documents, and Record Documents 6.1 Drawings and Specifications Copies Furnished. Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, the number of complete sets of the Drawings, Specifications, and addenda as provided in the Agreeement or the Owner s Special Conditions. Additional complete sets of Drawings and Specifications, if requested, will be furnished at reproduction cost to the entity requesting such additional sets. Electronic copies of such documents will be provided to Contractor without charge Ownership of Drawings and Specifications. All Drawings, Specifications and copies thereof furnished by A/E are to remain A/E s property. These documents are not to be used on any other project, and with the exception of the Contract record set and electronic versions needed for warranty operations, are to be returned to the A/E, upon request, following completion of the Work Interrelation of Documents. The Contract Documents as referenced in the Contract between Owner and Contractor are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all Resolution of Conflicts in Documents. Where conflicts may exist within the Contract Documents, the documents shall govern in the following order: (a) Change Orders, addenda, and written amendments to the Contract; (b) the Contract; (c) Drawings; (d) Specifications 20

24 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects (but Specifications shall control over Drawings as to quality of materials and installation); and (e) other Contract Documents. Among other categories of documents having the same order of precedence, the term or provision that includes the latest date shall control. Contractor shall notify A/E and ODR for resolution of the issue prior to executing the Work in question Contractor s Duty to Review Contract Documents. In order to facilitate its responsibilities for completion of the Work in accordance with and as reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents, prior to commencing the Work, Contractor shall examine and compare the Contract Documents, information furnished by Owner, relevant field measurements made by Contractor and any visible or reasonably anticipated conditions at the Site affecting the Work. This duty extends throughout the construction phase prior to commencing each particular work activity and/or system installation Discrepancies and Omissions in Drawings and Specifications Promptly report to ODR and to A/E the discovery of any apparent error, omission or inconsistency in the Contract Documents prior to execution of the Work It is recognized that Contractor is not acting in the capacity of a licensed design professional, unless it is performing as a Design-Build firm It is further recognized that Contractor s examination of Contract Documents is to facilitate construction and does not create an affirmative responsibility to detect errors, omissions or inconsistencies or to ascertain compliance with applicable laws, building codes or regulations, unless it is performing as a Design-Build firm or a Construction Manager-at-Risk When performing as a Design-Build firm, Contractor has sole responsibility for discrepancies, errors, and omissions in the Drawings and Specifications When performing as a Construction Manager-at-Risk, Contractor has a shared responsibility with A/E for discovery and resolution of discrepancies, errors, and omissions in the Contract Documents. In such case, Contractor s responsibility pertains to review, coordination, and recommendation of resolution strategies within budget constraints Contractor has no liability for errors, omissions, or inconsistencies unless Contractor knowingly failed to report a recognized problem to Owner or the Work is executed under a Design-Build or Construction Manager-at-Risk Contract as outlined above. Should Contractor fail to perform the examination and reporting obligations of these provisions, Contractor is responsible for avoidable costs and direct and/or consequential damages Owner does not warrant or make any representations as to the accuracy, suitability or completeness of any information furnished to Contractor by Owner or it representatives. 6.2 Requirements for Record Documents. Contractor shall: Maintain at the Site one copy of all Drawings, Specifications, addenda, approved submittals, Contract modifications, and all Project correspondence. Keep current and maintain Drawings and Specifications in good order with postings and markings to record actual conditions of Work and show and reference all changes made during construction. Provide Owner and A/E access to these documents Maintain the Record Documents which reflect the actual field conditions and representations 21

25 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects of the Work performed, whether it be directed by addendum, Change Order or otherwise. Make available the Record Documents and all records prescribed herein for reference and examination by Owner and its representatives and agents Update the Record Documents at least monthly prior to submission of periodic partial pay estimates. Failure to maintain current Record Documents constitutes cause for denial of a progress payment otherwise due Prior to requesting Substantial Completion inspection Contractor shall furnish a copy of its marked-up Record Documents and a preliminary copy of each instructional manual, maintenance and operating manual, parts catalog, wiring diagrams, spare parts, specified written warranties and like publications, or parts for all installed equipment, systems, and like items and as described in the Contract Documents Once determined acceptable by ODR with input from A/E, provide one (1) reproducible copy and one (1) electronic media copy in a format acceptable to the ODR `of all Record Documents, unless otherwise required by the Owner s Special Conditions Contractor shall be responsible for updating the Record Documents for all Contractor initiated documents and changes to the Contract Documents due to coordination and actual field conditions, including RFIs A/E shall be responsible for updating the Record Documents for any addenda, Change Orders, A/E supplemental instructions and any other alterations to the Contract Documents generated by A/E or Owner. Article 7. Construction Safety 7.1 General. It is the duty and responsibility of Contractor and all of its Subcontractors to be familiar with, enforce and comply with all requirements of Public Law No , 29 U.S.C. 651 et. seq., the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, (OSHA) and all amendments thereto. Contractor shall prepare a safety plan specific to the Project and submit it to ODR and A/E prior to commencing Work. In addition, Contractor and all of its Subcontractors shall comply with all applicable laws and regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for safety of persons or property to protect them from damage, injury or loss and erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. 7.2 Notices. Contractor shall provide notices as follows: Notify owners of adjacent property including those that own or operate utility services and/or underground facilities, and utility owners, when prosecution of the Work may affect them or their facilities, and cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation and replacement, and access to their facilities and/or utilities Coordinate the exchange of material safety data sheets (MSDSs) or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers at the site in connection with laws and regulations. Maintain a complete file of MSDSs for all materials in use on site throughout the construction phase and make such file available to Owner and its agents as requested. 7.3 Emergencies. In any emergency affecting the safety of persons or property, Contractor shall act to minimize, mitigate, and prevent threatened damage, injury or loss Have authorized agents of Contractor respond immediately upon call at any time of day or night when circumstances warrant the presence of Contractor to protect the Work or adjacent 22

26 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects property from damage or to take such action pertaining to the Work as may be necessary to provide for the safety of the public Give ODR and A/E prompt notice of all such events If Contractor believes that any changes in the Work or variations from Contract Documents have been caused by its emergency response, promptly notify Owner within seventy-two (72) hours of the emergency response event Should Contractor fail to respond, Owner is authorized to direct other forces to take action as necessary and Owner may deduct any cost of remedial action from funds otherwise due Contractor. 7.4 Injuries. In the event of an incident or accident involving outside medical care for an individual on or near the Work, Contractor shall notify ODR and other parties as may be directed promptly, but no later than twenty-four (24) hours after Contractor learns that an event required medical care Record the location of the event and the circumstances surrounding it, by using photography or other means, and gather witness statements and other documentation which describes the event Supply ODR and A/E with an incident report no later than thirty-six (36) hours after the occurrence of the event. In the event of a catastrophic incident (one (1) fatality or three (3) workers hospitalized), barricade and leave intact the scene of the incident until all investigations are complete. A full set of incident investigation documents, including facts, finding of cause, and remedial plans shall be provided within one (1) week after occurrence, unless otherwise directed by legal counsel. Contractor shall provide ODR with written notification within one week of such catastrophic event if legal counsel delays submission of full report. 7.5 Environmental Safety. Upon encountering any previously unknown potentially hazardous material, or other materials potentially contaminated by hazardous material, Contractor shall immediately stop work activities impacted by the discovery, secure the affected area, and notify ODR immediately Bind all Subcontractors to the same duty Upon receiving such notice, ODR will promptly engage qualified experts to make such investigations and conduct such tests as may be reasonably necessary to determine the existence or extent of any environmental hazard. Upon completion of this investigation, ODR will issue a written report to Contractor identifying the material(s) found and indicate any necessary steps to be taken to treat, handle, transport or dispose of the material Owner may hire third-party contractors to perform any or all such steps Should compliance with ODR s instructions result in an increase in Contractor s cost of performance, or delay the Work, Owner will make an equitable adjustment to the Contract Sum and/or the time of completion, and modify the Contract in writing accordingly. 7.6 Trenching Plan. When the project requires excavation which either exceeds a depth of four (4) feet, or results in any worker s upper body being positioned below grade level, Contractor is required to submit a trenching plan to ODR prior to commencing trenching operations unless an engineered plan is part of the Contract Documents. The plan is required to be prepared and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Texas, and hired or employed by Contractor or Subcontractor to perform the work. Said engineer cannot be anyone who is otherwise either directly or indirectly engaged on this project. 23

27 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects Article 8. Quality Control 8.1 Materials & Workmanship. Contractor shall execute Work in a good and workmanlike matter in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall develop and provide a quality control plan specific to this Project and acceptable to Owner. Where Contract Documents do not specify quality standards, complete and construct all Work in compliance with generally accepted construction industry standards. Unless otherwise specified, incorporate all new materials and equipment into the Work under the Contract. 8.2 Testing Owner is responsible for coordinating and paying for routine and special tests required to confirm compliance with quality and performance requirements, except as stated below or otherwise required by the Contract Documents Contractor shall provide the following testing as well as any other testing required of Contractor by the Specifications: Any test of basic material or fabricated equipment included as part of a submittal for a required item in order to establish compliance with the Contract Documents Any test of basic material or fabricated equipment offered as a substitute for a specified item on which a test may be required in order to establish compliance with the Contract Documents Preliminary, start-up, pre-functional and operational testing of building equipment and systems as necessary to confirm operational compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents All subsequent tests on original or replaced materials conducted as a result of prior testing failure All testing shall be performed in accordance with standard test procedures by an accredited laboratory, or special consultant as appropriate, acceptable to Owner. Results of all tests shall be provided promptly to ODR, A/E, and Contractor Non-Compliance (Test Results). Should any of the tests indicate that a material and/or system does not comply with the Contract requirements, the burden of proof remains with Contractor, subject to: Contractor selection and submission of the laboratory for Owner acceptance Acceptance by Owner of the quality and nature of tests All tests taken in the presence of A/E and/or ODR, or their representatives If tests confirm that the material/systems comply with Contract Documents, Owner will pay the cost of the test If tests reveal noncompliance, Contractor will pay those laboratory fees and costs of that particular test and all future tests, of that failing Work, necessary to eventually confirm compliance with Contract Documents Proof of noncompliance with the Contract Documents will make Contractor liable for any corrective action which ODR determines appropriate, including complete 24

28 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects removal and replacement of non-compliant work or material Notice of Testing. Contractor shall give ODR and A/E timely notice of its readiness and the date arranged so ODR and A/E may observe such inspection, testing, or approval Test Samples. Contractor is responsible for providing Samples of sufficient size for test purposes and for coordinating such tests with their Work Progress Schedule to avoid delay Covering Up Work. If Contractor covers up any Work without providing Owner an opportunity to inspect, Contractor shall, if requested by ODR, uncover and recover the work at Contractor s expense. 8.3 Submittals Contractor s Submittals. Contractor shall submit with reasonable promptness consistent with the Project schedule and in orderly sequence all Shop Drawings, Samples, or other information required by the Contract Documents, or subsequently required by Change Order. Prior to submitting, Contractor shall review each submittal for general compliance with Contract Documents and approve submittals for review by A/E and Owner by an approval stamp affixed to each copy. Submittal data presented without Contractor s stamp of approval will be returned without review or comment. Any delay resulting from Contractor s failure to certify approval of the Submittal is Contractor s responsibility Contractor shall within twenty-one (21) days of the effective date of the Notice To Proceed with construction, submit to ODR and A/E, a submittal schedule/register, organized by specification section, listing all items to be furnished for review and approval by A/E and Owner. The list shall include Shop Drawings, manufacturer s literature, certificates of compliance, materials Samples, materials colors, guarantees, and all other items identified throughout the Specifications Contractor shall indicate the type of item, Contract requirements reference, and Contractor s scheduled dates for submitting the item along with the requested dates for approval answers from A/E and Owner. The submittal register shall indicate the projected dates for procurement of all included items and shall be updated at least monthly with actual approval and procurement dates. Contractor s Submittal Register must be reasonable in terms of the review time for complex submittals. Contractor s submittal schedule must be consistent with the Work Progress Schedule and identify critical submittals. Show and allow a minimum of fifteen (15) days duration after receipt by A/E and ODR for review and approval. If re-submittal required, allow a minimum of an additional fifteen (15) days for review. Submit the updated Submittal Register with each request for progress payment. Owner may establish routine review procedures and schedules for submittals at the preconstruction conference and/or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. If Contractor fails to update and provide the Submittal Register as required, Owner may, after seven (7) days notice to Contractor withhold a reasonable sum of money that would otherwise be due Contractor Contractor shall coordinate the Submittal Register with the Work Progress Schedule. Do not schedule Work requiring a submittal to begin prior to scheduling review and approval of the related submittal. Revise and/or update both schedules monthly to ensure consistency and current project data. Provide to ODR the updated Submittal Register and schedule with each application for progress payment. Refer to requirements for the Work Progress Schedule for inclusion of procurement activities therein. Regardless, the Submittal Register shall identify dates submitted and returned and shall be used to confirm status and disposition of particular items submitted, including approval or other action taken and other 25

29 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects information not conveniently tracked through the Work Progress Schedule By submitting Shop Drawings, Samples or other required information, Contractor represents that it has determined and verified all applicable field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers and similar data; and has checked and coordinated each Shop Drawing and Sample with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents Review of Submittals. A/E and ODR review is only for conformance with the design concept and the information provided in the Contract Documents. Responses to submittals will be in writing. The approval of a separate item does not indicate approval of an assembly in which the item functions. The approval of a submittal does not relieve Contractor of responsibility for any deviation from the requirements of the Contract unless Contractor informs A/E and ODR of such deviation in a clear, conspicuous, and written manner on the submittal transmittal and at the time of submission, and obtains Owner s written specific approval of the particular deviation Correction and Resubmission. Contractor shall make any corrections required to a submittal and resubmit the required number of corrected copies promptly so as to avoid delay, until submittal approval. Direct attention in writing to A/E and ODR, when applicable, to any new revisions other than the corrections requested on previous submissions Limits on Shop Drawing Review. Contractor shall not commence any Work requiring a submittal until review of the submittal under Subsection Construct all such work in accordance with reviewed submittals. Comments incorporated as part of the review in Subsection of Shop Drawings and Samples is not authorization to Contractor to perform extra work or changed work unless authorized through a Change Order. A/E s and ODR s review, if any, does not relieve Contractor from responsibility for defects in the Work resulting from errors or omissions of any kind on the submittal, regardless of any approval action No Substitutions Without Approval. ODR and A/E may receive and consider Contractor s request for substitution when Contractor agrees to reimburse Owner for review costs and satisfies the requirements of this section. If Contractor does not satisfy these conditions, ODR and A/E will return the request without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements. Owner will not consider the request if Contractor cannot provide the product or method because of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly. Contractor s request for a substitution may be considered by ODR and A/E when: The Contract Documents do not require extensive revisions; and Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of the Contract Documents and the design intent of A/E and do not result in an increase in cost to Owner; and The request is timely, fully documented, properly submitted and one or more of the following apply: Contractor cannot provide the specified product, assembly or method of construction within the Contract Time; The request directly relates to an or-equal clause or similar language in the Contract Documents; The request directly relates to a product design standard or performance standard clause in the Contract Documents; 26

30 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects The requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume; The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by an authority having jurisdiction, and ODR can approve the requested substitution; Contractor cannot provide the specified product, assembly or method of construction in a manner that is compatible with other materials and where Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility; Contractor cannot coordinate the specified product, assembly or method of construction with other materials and where Contractor certifies they can coordinate the proposed substitution; or The specified product, assembly or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by the Contract Documents and where Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution provides the required warranty Unauthorized Substitutions at Contractor s Risk. Contractor is financially responsible for any additional costs or delays resulting from unauthorized substitution of materials, equipment or fixtures other than those specified. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for any increased design or contract administration costs resulting from such unauthorized substitutions. 8.4 Field Mock-up Mock-ups shall be constructed prior to commencement of a specified scope of work to confirm acceptable workmanship As a minimum, field mock-ups shall be constructed for roofing systems, exterior veneer / finish systems, glazing systems, and any other Work requiring a mock-up as identified throughout the Contract Documents. Mock-ups for systems not part of the Project scope shall not be required Mock-ups may be incorporated into the Work if allowed by the Contract Documents and if acceptable to ODR. If mock-ups are freestanding, they shall remain in place until otherwise directed by Owner Contractor shall include field mock-ups in their Work Progress Schedule and shall notify ODR and A/E of readiness for review sufficiently in advance to coordinate review without delay. 8.5 Inspection During Construction Contractor shall provide sufficient, safe, and proper facilities, including equipment as necessary for safe access, at all reasonable times for observation and/or inspection of the Work by Owner and its agents Contractor shall not cover up any Work with finishing materials or other building components prior to providing Owner and its agents an opportunity to perform an inspection of the Work Should corrections of the Work be required for approval, Contractor shall not over 27

31 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects Article 9. Construction Schedules up corrected Work until Owner indicates approval Contractor shall provide notification of at least five (5) working days or otherwise as mutually agreed, to ODR of the anticipated need for a cover-up inspection. Should ODR fail to make the necessary inspection within the agreed period, Contractor may proceed with cover-up Work, but is not relieved of responsibility for Work to comply with requirements of the Contract Documents. 9.1 Contract Time. TIME IS AN ESSENTIAL ELEMENT OF THE CONTRACT. The Contract Time is the time between the dates indicated in the Notice to Proceed for commencement of the Work and for achieving Substantial Completion. The Contract Time can be modified only by Change Order. Failure to achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time or as otherwise agreed to in writing will cause damage to Owner and may subject Contractor to liquidated damages as provided in the Contract Documents. If Contractor fails to achieve Final Completion in a reasonable time after Substantial Completion, Contractor shall be responsible for Owner s damages including, but not limited to, additional inspection, project management, and maintenance cost to the extent caused by Contractor s failure to achieve Final Completion. 9.2 Notice to Proceed. Owner will issue a Notice to Proceed which shall state the dates for beginning Work and for achieving Substantial Completion of the Work. 9.3 Work Progress Schedule. Refer to Owner s Special Conditions and Division 1 of the Specifications for additional schedule requirements. Unless indicated otherwise in those documents, Contractor shall submit their initial Work Progress Schedule for the Work in relation to the entire Project not later than twenty-one (21) calendar days after the effective date of the Notice to Proceed to ODR and A/E. Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, the Work Progress Schedule shall be computerized Critical Path Method (CPM) with fully editable logic. This initial schedule shall indicate the dates for starting and completing the various aspects required to complete the Work, including mobilization, procurement, installation, testing, inspection, delivery of Close-out Documents and acceptance of all the Work of the Contract. When acceptable to Owner, the initially accepted schedule shall be the Baseline Schedule for comparison to actual conditions throughout the Contract duration. Note: This article pertains to construction phase schedules. Additional requirements for design phase scheduling for Construction Manager-at-Risk and Design-Build contracts are outlined in Division 1 Project Planning and Scheduling Specifications Schedule Requirements. Contractor shall submit electronic and paper copy of the initial Work Progress Schedule reflecting accurate and reliable representations of the planned progress of the Work, the Work to date if any, and of Contractor s actual plans for its completion. Contractor shall organize and provide adequate detail so the schedule is capable of measuring and forecasting the effect of delaying events on completed and uncompleted activities Contractor shall re-submit initial schedule as required to address review comments from A/E and ODR until such schedule is accepted as the Baseline Schedule Submittal of a schedule, schedule revision or schedule update constitutes Contractor s representation to Owner of the accurate depiction of all progress to date and that Contractor will follow the schedule as submitted in performing the Work Schedule Updates. Contractor shall update the Work Progress Schedule and the Submittal Register monthly, as a minimum, to reflect progress to date and current plans for completing the Work, while maintaining original schedule as Baseline Schedule and submit paper and electronic copies of the update to A/E and ODR as directed, but as a minimum with each 28

32 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects request for payment. Owner has no duty to make progress payments unless accompanied by the updated Work Progress Schedule. Show the anticipated date of completion reflecting all extensions of time granted through Change Order as of the date of the update. Contractor may revise the Work Progress Schedule when in Contractor s judgment it becomes necessary for the management of the Work. Contractor shall identify all proposed changes to schedule logic to Owner and to A/E via an executive summary accompanying the updated schedule for review prior to final implementation of revisions into a revised Baseline Schedule. Schedule changes that materially impact Owner s operations shall be communicated promptly to ODR and shall not be incorporated into the revised Baseline Schedule without ODR s consent The Work Progress Schedule is for Contractor s use in managing the Work and submittal of the schedule, and successive updates or revisions, is for the information of Owner and to demonstrate that Contractor has complied with requirements for planning the Work. Owner s acceptance of a schedule, schedule update or revision constitutes Owner s agreement to coordinate its own activities with Contractor s activities as shown on the schedule Acceptance of the Work Progress Schedule, or update and/or revision thereto does not indicate any approval of Contractor s proposed sequences and duration Acceptance of a Work Progress Schedule update or revision indicating early or late completion does not constitute Owner s consent, alter the terms of the Contract, or waive either Contractor s responsibility for timely completion or Owner s right to damages for Contractor s failure to do so Contractor s scheduled dates for completion of any activity or the entire Work do not constitute a change in terms of the Contract. Change Orders are the only method of modifying the Substantial Completion Date(s) and Contract Time. 9.4 Ownership of Float. Unless indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall develop its schedule, pricing, and execution plan to provide a minimum of ten (10) percent total float at acceptance of the Baseline Schedule. Float time contained in the Work Progress Schedule is not for the exclusive benefit of Contractor or Owner, but belongs to the Project and may be consumed by either party. Before Contractor uses any portion of the float Contractor must submit a written request to do so to the Owner and receive Owner s written authorization to use the float. Owner s approval shall not be unreasonably withheld. 9.5 Completion of Work. Contractor is accountable for completing the Work within the Contract Time stated in the Contract, or as otherwise amended by Change Order If, in the judgment of Owner, the work is behind schedule and the rate of placement of work is inadequate to regain scheduled progress to insure timely completion of the entire work or a separable portion thereof, Contractor, when so informed by Owner, shall immediately take action to increase the rate of work placement by: An increase in working forces An increase in equipment or tools An increase in hours of work or number of shifts Expedite delivery of materials Other action proposed if acceptable to Owner Within ten (10) days after such notice from ODR, Contractor shall notify ODR in writing of the specific measures taken and/or planned to increase the rate of progress. Contactor shall 29

33 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects include an estimate as to the date of scheduled progress recovery and an updated Work Progress Schedule illustrating Contractor s plan for achieving timely completion of the Project. Should ODR deem the plan of action inadequate, Contractor shall take additional steps or make adjustments as necessary to its plan of action until it meets with ODR s approval. 9.6 Modification of the Contract Time Delays and extension of time as hereinafter described are valid only if executed in accordance with provisions set forth in Article When a delay defined herein as excusable prevents Contractor from completing the Work within the Contract Time, Contractor is entitled to an extension of time. Owner will make an equitable adjustment and extend the number of days lost because of excusable delay or Weather Days, as measured by Contractor s progress schedule. All extensions of time will be granted in calendar days. In no event, however, will an extension of time be granted for delays that merely extend the duration of non-critical activities, or which only consume float without delaying the project Substantial Completion date(s) A Weather Day is a day on which Contractor s current schedule indicates Work is to be done, and on which inclement weather and related site conditions prevent Contractor from performing seven (7) hours of Work between the hours of 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. Weather days are excusable delays. When weather conditions at the site prevent work from proceeding, Contractor shall immediately notify ODR for confirmation of the conditions. At the end of each calendar month, Contractor shall submit to ODR and A/E a list of Weather Days occurring in that month along with documentation of the impact on critical activities. Based on confirmation by ODR, any time extension granted will be issued by Change Order. If Contractor and Owner cannot agree on the time extension, Owner may issue a ULCO for fair and reasonable time extension Excusable Delay. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment of the Contract Time, issued via change order, for delays caused by the following: Errors, omissions and imperfections in design, which A/E corrects by means of changes in the Drawings and Specifications Unanticipated physical conditions at the Site, which A/E corrects by means of changes to the Drawings and Specifications or for which ODR directs changes in the Work identified in the Contract Documents Changes in the Work that effect activities identified in Contractor s schedule as critical to completion of the entire Work, if such changes are ordered by ODR or recommended by A/E and ordered by ODR Suspension of Work for unexpected natural events (sometimes called acts of God ), civil unrest, strikes or other events which are not within the reasonable control of Contractor Suspension of Work for convenience of ODR, which prevents Contractor from completing the Work within the Contract Time Contractor s relief in the event of such delays is the time impact to the critical path as determined by analysis of Contractor s schedule. In the event that Contractor incurs 30

34 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects additional direct costs because of the excusable delays other than described in Subparagraph and within the reasonable control of Owner, the Contract price and Contract Time are to be equitably adjusted by Owner pursuant to the provisions of Article No Damages for Delay. An extension of the Contract Time shall be the sole remedy of Contractor for delays in performance of the Work, whether or not such delays are foreseeable, except for delays caused solely by acts of Owner that constitute intentional interference with Contractor s performance of the Work and then only to the extent such acts continue after Contractor notifies Owner in writing of such interference. For delays caused by any act(s) other than the sole intentional interference of Owner, Contractor shall not be entitled to any compensation or recovery of any damages including, without limitation, consequential damages, lost opportunity costs, impact damages, loss of productivity, or other similar damages. Owner s exercise of any of its rights or remedies under the Contract including, without limitation, ordering changes in the Work or directing suspension, rescheduling, or correction of the Work, shall not be construed as intentional interference with Contractor s performance of the Work regardless of the extent or frequency of Owner s exercise of such rights or remedies. 9.8 Concurrent Delay. When the completion of the Work is simultaneously delayed by an excusable delay and a delay arising from a cause not designated as excusable, Contractor may not be entitled to a time extension for the period of concurrent delay. 9.9 Other Time Extension Requests. Time extensions requested in association with changes to the Work directed or requested by Owner shall be included with Contractor s proposed costs for such change. Time extensions requested for inclement weather are covered by Paragraph above. If Contractor believes that the completion of the Work is delayed by a circumstance other than for changes directed to the Work or weather, they shall give ODR written notice, stating the nature of the delay and the activities potentially affected, within five (5) days after the onset of the event or circumstance giving rise to the excusable delay. Contractor shall provide sufficient written evidence to document the delay. In the case of a continuing cause of delay, only one notice of claim is necessary. State claims for extensions of time in numbers of whole or half days Within ten (10) days after the cessation of the delay, Contractor shall formalize its request for extension of time in writing to include a full analysis of the schedule impact of the delay and substantiation of the excusable nature of the delay. All changes to the Contract Time or made as a result of such claims is by Change Order, as set forth in Article No extension of time releases Contractor or the Surety furnishing a performance or payment bond from any obligations under the Contract or such a bond. Those obligations remain in full force until the discharge of the Contract Contents of Time Extension Requests. Contractor shall provide with each Time Extension Request a quantitative demonstration of the impact of the delay on project completion time, based on the Work Progress Schedule. Contractor shall include with Time Extension Requests a reasonably detailed narrative setting forth: The nature of the delay and its cause; the basis of Contractor s claim of entitlement to a time extension Documentation of the actual impacts of the claimed delay on the critical path indicated in Contractor s Work Progress Schedule, and any concurrent delays Description and documentation of steps taken by Contractor to mitigate the effect of the claimed delay, including, when appropriate, the modification of the Work Progress Schedule Owner s Response. Owner will respond to the Time Extension Request by providing to 31

35 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects Contractor written notice of the number of days granted, if any, and giving its reason if this number differs from the number of days requested by Contractor Owner will not grant time extensions for delays that do not affect the Contract Substantial Completion date Owner will respond to each properly submitted Time Extension Request within fifteen (15) days following receipt. If Owner cannot reasonably make a determination about Contractor s entitlement to a time extension within that time, Owner will notify Contractor in writing. Unless otherwise agreed by Contractor, Owner has no more than fifteen (15) additional days to prepare a final response. If Owner fails to respond within forty-five (45) days from the date the Time Extension Request is received, Contractor s request for a time extension shall be deemed rejected by Owner Failure to Complete Work Within the Contract Time. TIME IS AN ESSENTIAL ELEMENT OF THE CONTRACT. Contractor s failure to substantially complete the Work within the Contract Time or to achieve Substantial Completion as required will cause damage to Owner. These damages shall may be liquidated by agreement of Contractor and Owner, in the amount per day as set forth in the Contract Documents Liquidated Damages. Owner may collect liquidated damages due from Contractor directly or indirectly by reducing the Contract Sum in the amount of liquidated damages stated in the Agreement or the Owner s Special Conditions. Article 10. Payments 10.1 Schedule of Values. Contractor shall submit to ODR and A/E for acceptance a Schedule of Values accurately itemizing material and labor for the various classifications of the Work based on the organization of the specification sections and of sufficient detail acceptable to ODR. The accepted Schedule of Values will be the basis for the progress payments under the Contract No progress payments will be made prior to receipt and acceptance of the Schedule of Values, provided in such detail as required by ODR, and submitted not less than twenty-one (21) days prior to the first request for payment. The Schedule of Values shall follow the order of trade divisions of the Specifications and include itemized costs for general conditions, costs for preparing close out Close-Out documents, fees, contingencies, and Owner cash allowances, if applicable, so that the sum of the items will equal the Contract price. As appropriate, assign each item labor and/or material values, the subtotal thereof equaling the value of the work in place when complete Owner requires that the Work items be inclusive of the cost of the Work items only. Any contract markups for overhead and profit, general conditions, etc., shall be contained within separate line items for those specific purposes which shall be divided into at least two (2) lines, one (1) for labor and one (1) for materials Contractor shall retain a copy of all worksheets used in preparation of its bid or proposal, supported by a notarized statement that the worksheets are true and complete copies of the documents used to prepare the bid or proposal. Make the worksheets available to ODR at the time of Contract execution. Thereafter Contractor shall grant Owner during normal business hours access to said copy of worksheets at any time during the period commencing upon execution of the Contract and ending one year after final payment Progress Payments. Contractor will receive periodic progress payments for Work performed, materials in place, suitably stored on Site, or as otherwise agreed to by Owner and Contractor. Payment is not due until receipt by ODR or his designee of a correct and complete Pay Application in electronic 32

36 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects and/or hard copy format as set forth in the Agreement or the Owner s Special Conditions, and certified by A/E. Progress payments are made provisionally and do not constitute acceptance of work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. Owner will not process progress payment applications for Change Order Work until all parties execute the Change Order Preliminary Pay Worksheet. Once each month that a progress payment is to be requested, the Contractor shall submit to A/E and ODR a complete, clean copy of a preliminary pay worksheet or preliminary pay application, to include the following: Contractor s estimate of the amount of Work performed, labor furnished and materials incorporated into the Work, using the established Schedule of Values; An updated Work Progress Schedule including the executive summary and all required schedule reports; HUB subcontracting plan Progress Assessment Report as required in Paragraph ; Such additional documentation as Owner may require as set forth in the elsewhere in the Contract Documents; and Construction payment affidavit Contractor s Application for Payment. As soon as practicable, but in no event later than seven (7) days after receipt of the preliminary pay worksheet, A/E and ODR will meet with Contractor to review the preliminary pay worksheet and to observe the condition of the Work. Based on this review, ODR and A/E may require modifications to the preliminary pay worksheet prior to the submittal of an Application for Payment, and will promptly notify Contractor of revisions necessary for approval. As soon as practicable, Contractor shall submit its Application for Payment on the appropriate and completed form, reflecting the required modifications to the Schedule of Values required by A/E and/or ODR. Attach all additional documentation required by ODR and/or A/E, as well as an affidavit affirming that all payrolls, bills for labor, materials, equipment, subcontracted work and other indebtedness connected with Contractor s Application for Payment are paid or will be paid within the time specified in Tex. Gov t Code, Chapter No Application for Payment is complete unless it fully reflects all required modifications, and attaches all required documentation including Contractor s affidavit Certification by Architect/Engineer. Within five (5) days or earlier following A/E s receipt of Contractor s formal Application for Payment, A/E will review the Application for Payment for completeness, and forward it to ODR. A/E will certify that the application is complete and payable, or that it is incomplete, stating in particular what is missing. If the Application for Payment is incomplete, Contractor shall make the required corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment for processing Owner s Duty to Pay. Owner has no duty to pay the Contractor except on receipt by ODR of: 1) a complete Application for Payment certified by A/E; 2) Contractor s updated Work Progress Schedule; and 3) confirmation that Contractor has maintained and updated the Record Documents kept at the Site Payment for stored materials and/or equipment confirmed by Owner and A/E to be on-site or otherwise properly stored is limited to eighty-five (85) percent of the invoice price or eightyfive (85) percent of the scheduled value for the materials or equipment, whichever is less Retainage. Owner will withhold from each progress payment, as retainage, five (5) percent of the total earned amount, the amount authorized by law, or as otherwise set forth in the Owner s Special Conditions. Retainage is managed in conformance with Tex. Gov t Code, 33

37 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects Chapter 2252, Subchapter B Contractor shall provide written consent of its surety for any request for reduction or release of retainage At least sixty-five (65) percent of the Contract, or such other discrete Work phase as set forth in Subsection or Work package delineated in the Contract Documents, must be completed before Owner can consider a retainage reduction or release Contractor shall not withhold retainage from their Subcontractors and suppliers in amounts that are any percentage greater than that withheld in its Contract with Owner under this subsection, unless otherwise acceptable to Owner Price Reduction to Cover Loss. Owner may reduce any Application for Payment, prior to payment to the extent necessary to protect Owner from loss on account of actions of Contractor including, but not limited to, the following: Defective or incomplete Work not remedied; Damage to Work of a separate Contractor; Failure to maintain scheduled progress or reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time; Persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; Reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid portion of the Contract Sum; Assessment of fines for violations of prevailing wage rate law; or Failure to include the appropriate amount of retainage for that periodic progress payment Title to all material and Work covered by progress payments transfers to Owner upon payment Transfer of title to Owner does not relieve Contractor and its Subcontractors of the sole responsibility for the care and protection of materials and Work upon which payments have been made until final acceptance, or the restoration of any damaged Work, or waive the right of Owner to require the fulfillment of all the terms of the Contract Progress Payments. Progress payments to Contractor do not release Contractor or its surety from any obligations under the Contract Upon Owner s request, Contractor shall furnish manifest proof of the status of Subcontractor s accounts in a form acceptable to Owner Pay estimate certificates must be signed by a corporate officer or a representative duly authorized by Contractor Provide copies of bills of lading, invoices, delivery receipts or other evidence of the location and value of such materials in requesting payment for materials. 34

38 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects For purposes of Tex. Gov t Code (a)(2), the date the performance of service is complete is the date when ODR approves the Application for Payment Off-Site Storage. With prior approval by Owner and in the event Contractor elects to store materials at an off-site location, abide by the following conditions, unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner Store materials in a commercial warehouse meeting the criteria stated below Provide insurance coverage adequate not only to cover materials while in storage, but also in transit from the off-site storage areas to the Project Site. Copies of duly authenticated certificates of insurance, made out to insure the State agency which is signatory to the Contract, must be filed with Owner s representative Inspection by Owner s representative is allowed at any time. Owner s inspectors must be satisfied with the security, control, maintenance, and preservation measures Materials for this Project are physically separated and marked for the Project in a sectionedoff area. Only materials which have been approved through the submittal process are to be considered for payment Owner reserves the right to reject materials at any time prior to final acceptance of the complete Contract if they do not meet Contract requirements regardless of any previous progress payment made With each monthly payment estimate, submit a report to ODR and A/E listing the quantities of materials already paid for and still stored in the off-site location Make warehouse records, receipts and invoices available to Owner s representatives, upon request, to verify the quantities and their disposition In the event of Contract termination or default by Contractor, the items in storage off-site, upon which payment has been made, will be promptly turned over to Owner or Owner s agents at a location near the jobsite as directed by ODR. The full provisions of performance and payment bonds on this Project cover the materials off-site in every respect as though they were stored on the Project Site Time for Payment by Contractor Pursuant to Tex. Gov t Code Article 11. Changes Contractor who receives a payment from a governmental entity shall pay Subcontractor the appropriate share of the payment not later than the tenth (10 th ) day after the date Contractor receives the payment The appropriate share is overdue on the eleventh (11 th ) day after the date Contractor receives the payment Change Orders. A Change Order issued after execution of the Contract is a written order to Contractor, signed by ODR, Contractor, and A/E, authorizing a change in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. The Contract Sum and the Contract Time can only be changed by Change Order. A Change Order signed by Contractor indicates his agreement therewith, including the adjustment in the Contract Sum and/or the Contract Time. ODR may issue a written authorization for Contractor to proceed with Work of a Change Order in advance of final execution by all parties in accordance with Section

39 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects Owner, without invalidating the Contract and without approval of Contractor s Surety, may order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, and the Contract Sum and the Contract Time will be adjusted accordingly. All such changes in the Work shall be authorized by Change Order or ULCO, and shall be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents. If such changes cause an increase or decrease in Contractor s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Contract, an equitable adjustment shall be made and confirmed in writing in a Change Order or a ULCO Owner and Contractor acknowledge and agree that the Specifications and Drawings may not be complete or free from errors, omissions and imperfections and that they may require changes or additions in order for the Work to be completed to the satisfaction of Owner. Therefore, any minor errors, omissions or imperfections in the Specifications or Drawings, or any changes in or additions to the Specifications or Drawings to correct minor errors or omissions or to the Work ordered by Owner shall not constitute or give rise to any claim, demand or cause of action of any nature whatsoever in favor of Contractor, whether for breach of Contract, or otherwise. However, should the nature of the errors or omissions necessitate substantial changes in the Work such that a Change Order is appropriate, Owner shall be liable to Contractor for the sum stated to be due Contractor in any Change Order approved and signed by both parties. The sum established in any Change Order, together with any extension of time contained in said Change Order, shall constitute full compensation to Contractor for all costs, expenses and damages to Contractor for the changes in the Work described in the Change Order, as permitted under Tex. Gov t Code, Chapter Procedures for administration of Change Orders shall be established by Owner and stated in the Owner s Special Conditions, or elsewhere in the Contract Documents No verbal order, verbal statement, or verbal direction of Owner or his duly appointed representative shall be treated as a change under this article or entitle Contractor to an adjustment Contractor agrees that Owner or any of its duly authorized representatives shall have access and the right to examine any directly pertinent books, documents, papers, and records of Contractor. Further, Contractor agrees to include in all its subcontracts a provision to the effect that Subcontractor agrees that Owner or any of its duly authorized representatives shall have access to and the right to examine any directly pertinent books, documents, papers and records of such Subcontractor relating to any claim arising from the Contract, whether or not the Subcontractor is a party to the claim. The period of access and examination described herein which relates to appeals under the Disputes article of the Contract, litigation, or the settlement of claims arising out of the performance of the Contract shall continue until final disposition of such claims, appeals or litigation Unit Prices. If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon and if the quantities originally contemplated in setting the unit prices are so changed in a Proposed Change Order that application of the agreed unit prices to the quantities of work proposed will cause substantial inequity to Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted as provided in the Owner s Special Conditions or as agreed to by the parties and incorporated into a Change Order Claims for Additional Costs If Contractor wishes to make a claim for an increase in the Contract Sum not related to a requested change, it shall give Owner and A/E written notice thereof within twenty-one (21) days after the occurrence of the event or discovery of any conditions giving rise to such claim. Contractor must notify Owner and A/E before proceeding to execute any Work considered to add additional cost or time, except in an emergency endangering life or property in which case Contractor shall act in accordance with Subsection , and failure to provide the 36

40 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects required notice will invalidate any subsequent notice or claim for additional cost or time for the Work. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree on the amount of the adjustment in the Contract Sum, it shall be determined as set forth under Article 15. Any change in the Contract Sum resulting from such claim shall be authorized by a Change Order or a ULCO If Contractor claims that additional cost is involved because of, but not limited to, 1) any written interpretation of the Contract Documents, 2) any order by Owner to stop the Work pursuant to Article 14 where Contractor was not at fault, or 3) any written order for a minor change in the Work issued pursuant to Section 11.4, Contractor shall make such claim as provided in Subsection Should Contractor or his Subcontractors fail to call attention of A/E to discrepancies or omissions in the Contract Documents, but claim additional costs for corrective Work after Contract award, Owner may assume intent to circumvent competitive bidding for necessary corrective Work. In such case, Owner may choose to let a separate Contract for the corrective Work, or issue a ULCO to require performance by Contractor. Claims for time extensions or for extra cost resulting from delayed notice of patent Contract Document discrepancies or omissions will not be considered by Owner Minor Changes. A/E, with concurrence of ODR, will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment in the Contract Sum or an extension of the Contract Time. Such changes shall be effected by written order which Contractor shall carry out promptly and record on the Record Documents Concealed Site Conditions. Contractor is responsible for visiting the Site and being familiar with local conditions such as the location, accessibility, and general character of the Site and/or building. If, in the performance of the Contract, subsurface, latent, or concealed conditions at the Site are found to be materially different from the information included in the Contract Documents, or if unknown conditions of an unusual nature are disclosed differing materially from the conditions usually inherent in Work of the character shown and specified, ODR and A/E shall be notified in writing of such conditions before they are disturbed. Upon such notice, or upon its own observation of such conditions, A/E, with the approval of ODR, will promptly make such changes in the Drawings and Specifications as they deem necessary to conform to the different conditions, and any increase or decrease in the cost of the Work, or in the time within which the Work is to be completed, resulting from such changes will be adjusted by Change Order, subject to the prior approval of ODR Extension of Time. All changes to the Contract Time shall be made as a consequence of requests as required under Section 9.6, and as documented by Change Order as provided under Section Administration of Change Order Requests. All changes in the Contract shall be administered in accordance with procedures approved by Owner, and when required, make use of such electronic information management system(s) as Owner may employ Routine changes in the construction Contract shall be formally initiated by A/E by means of a PCO form detailing requirements of the proposed change for pricing by Contractor. This action may be preceded by communications between Contractor, A/E and ODR concerning the need and nature of the change, but such communications shall not constitute a basis for beginning the proposed Work by Contractor. Except for emergency conditions described below, approval of Contractor s cost proposal by A/E and ODR will be required for authorization to proceed with the Work being changed. Owner will not be responsible for the cost of Work changed without prior approval and Contractor may be required to remove Work so installed All proposed costs for change order Work must be supported by itemized accounting of material, equipment and associated itemized installation costs in sufficient detail, following the outline and organization of the established Schedule of Values, to permit analysis by A/E 37

41 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects and ODR using current estimating guides and/or practices. Photocopies of Subcontractor and vendor proposals shall be furnished unless specifically waived by ODR. Contractor shall provide written response to a change request within twenty-one (21) days of receipt Any unexpected circumstance which necessitates an immediate change in order to avoid a delay in progress of the Work may be expedited by verbal communication and authorization between Contractor and Owner, with written confirmation following within twenty-four (24) hours. A limited scope not-to-exceed estimate of cost and time will be requested prior to authorizing Work to proceed. Should the estimate be impractical for any reason, ODR may authorize the use of detailed cost records of such work to establish and confirm the actual costs and time for documentation in a formal Change Order Emergency changes to save life or property may be initiated by Contractor alone (see Section 7.3) with the claimed cost and/or time of such work to be fully documented as to necessity and detail of the reported costs and/or time The method of incorporating approved Change Orders into the parameters of the accepted Schedule of Values must be coordinated and administered in a manner acceptable to ODR Pricing Change Order Work. The amounts that Contractor and/or its Subcontractor adds to a Change Order for profit and overhead will also be considered by Owner before approval is given. The amounts established hereinafter are the maximums that are acceptable to Owner For Work performed by its forces, Contractor will be allowed its actual costs paid for materials, the total amount of its actual wages paid for labor, plus its actual cost paid for of State and Federal payroll taxes and for of worker s compensation and comprehensive general liability insurance, plus its actual additional bond and builders risk insurance cost if the change results in an increase in the premium paid by Contractor. To the total of the above costs, Contractor will be allowed to add a percentage as noted below to cover overhead and profit combined. Overhead shall be considered to include insurance other than mentioned above, field and office supervisors and assistants, including safety and scheduling personnel, use of small tools, incidental job burdens and general Home Office expenses, and no separate allowance will be made therefore. Allowable percentages for overhead and profit on changes will not exceed 15 percent if the total of self-performed work is less than or equal to $10,000, 10 percent if the total of selfperformed work is between $10,000 and $20,000 and 7.5 percent if the total of self-performed work is over $20,000, for any specific change priced For subcontracted Work each affected Subcontractor shall figure its costs, overhead and profit as described above for Contractor s Work, all Subcontractor costs shall be combined, and to that total Subcontractor cost Contractor will be allowed to add a maximum mark-up of ten (10) percent if the total of all subcontracted work is less than or equal to $10,000, seven and half (7.5) percent if the total of all subcontracted work is between $10,000 and $20,000 and five (5) percent if the total of all subcontractor work is over $20, On changes involving both additions and deletions, percentages for overhead and profit will be allowed only on the net addition. Owner does not accept and will not pay for additional Contract cost identified as indirect or consequential damages or as damages caused by delay For Contracts based on a Guaranteed Maximum Price (GMP), the Construction Managerat-Risk or Design Builder shall NOT be entitled to a percentage mark-up on any Change Order Work unless the Change Order increases the Guaranteed Maximum Price. 38

42 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects 11.9 Unilateral Change Order (ULCO). Owner may issue a written ULCO directing a change in the Work prior to reaching agreement with Contractor on the adjustment, if any, in the Contract price and/or the Contract Time Owner and Contractor shall negotiate for appropriate adjustments, as applicable, to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time arising out of a ULCO. As the changed Work is performed, Contractor shall submit its costs for such Work with its Application for Payment beginning with the next Application for Payment within thirty (30) days of the issuance of the ULCO. The Parties reserve their rights to dispute the ULCO amount, subject to Article Finality of Changes Contractor. Upon execution of a Change Order and /or a ULCO by Owner, Contractor and A/E, all costs and time issues claimed by Contractor regarding that change are final and not subject to increase Audit of Changes Owner. All Changes Orders are subject to audit by Owner or its representative at any time in accordance with Article 16.4 and Change Order amounts may be adjusted lower as a result of such audit. Article 12. Project Completion and Acceptance 12.1 Closing Inspections Substantial Completion Inspection. When Contractor considers the entire Work or part thereof Substantially Complete, it shall notify ODR in writing that the Work will be ready for Substantial Completion inspection on a specific date. Contractor shall include with this notice Contractor s Punchlist to indicate that it has previously inspected all the Work associated with the request for inspection, noting items it has corrected and included all remaining work items with date scheduled for completion or correction prior to final inspection. The failure to include any items on this list does not alter the responsibility of Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. If any of the items on this list prevents the Project from being used as intended, Contractor shall not request a Substantial Completion Inspection. Owner and its representatives will review the list of items and schedule the requested inspection, or inform Contractor in writing that such an inspection is premature because the Work is not sufficiently advanced or conditions are not as represented on Contractor s list Prior to the Substantial Completion inspection, Contractor shall furnish a copy of its marked-up Record Documents and a preliminary copy of each instructional manual, maintenance and operating manual, parts catalog, wiring diagrams, spare parts, specified written warranties, and like publications or parts for all installed equipment, systems, and like items as described in the Contract Documents. Delivery of these items is a prerequisite for requesting the Substantial Completion inspection On the date requested by Contractor, or as mutually agreed upon pending the status of the Open Items List, A/E, ODR, Contractor, and other Owner representatives as determined by Owner will jointly attend the Substantial Completion inspection, which shall be conducted by ODR or their delegate. If ODR concurs with the determination of Contractor and A/E that the Work is Substantially Complete, ODR will issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion to be signed by A/E, Owner, and Contractor establishing the date of Substantial Completion and identifying responsibilities for security, insurance and maintenance. A/E will provide with this certificate a list of Punchlist items (the pre-final Punchlist) for completion prior to final inspection. This list may include items in addition to those on Contractor s Punchlist, which the inspection team deems necessary to correct or complete prior to final inspection. If Owner 39

43 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects occupies the Project upon determination of Substantial Completion, Contractor shall complete all corrective Work at the convenience of Owner, without disruption to Owner s use of the Project for its intended purposes Final Inspection. Contractor shall complete the list of items identified on the pre-final Punchlist prior to requesting a final inspection. Unless otherwise specified, or otherwise agreed in writing by the parties as documented on the Certificate of Substantial Completion, Contractor shall complete and/or correct all Work within thirty (30) days of the Substantial Completion date. Upon completion of the pre-final Punchlist work, Contractor shall give written notice to ODR and A/E that the Work will be ready for final inspection on a specific date. Contractor shall accompany this notice with a copy of the updated pre-final Punchlist indicating resolution of all items. On the date specified or as soon thereafter as is practicable, ODR, A/E and Contractor will inspect the Work. A/E will submit to Contractor a final Punchlist of open items that the inspection team requires corrected or completed before final acceptance of the Work Correct or complete all items on the final Punchlist before requesting Final Payment. Unless otherwise agreed to in writing by the parties, complete this work within seven (7) days of receiving the final Punchlist. Upon completion of the final Punchlist, notify A/E and ODR in writing stating the disposition of each final Punchlist item. A/E, Owner, and Contractor shall promptly inspect the completed items. When the final Punchlist is complete, and the Contract is fully satisfied according to the Contract Documents ODR will issue a certificate establishing the date of Final Completion. Completion of all Work is a condition precedent to Contractor s right to receive Final Payment Annotation. Any Certificate issued under this Article may be annotated to indicate that it is not applicable to specified portions of the Work, or that it is subject to any limitation as determined by Owner Purpose of Inspection. Inspection is for determining the completion of the Work, and does not relieve Contractor of its overall responsibility for completing the Work in a good and competent fashion, in compliance with the Contract. Work accepted with incomplete Punchlist items or failure of Owner or other parties to identify Work that does not comply with the Contract Documents or is defective in operation or workmanship does not constitute a waiver of Owner s rights under the Contract or relieve Contractor of its responsibility for performance or warranties Additional Inspections If Owner s inspection team determines that the Work is not substantially complete at the Substantial Completion inspection, ODR or A/E will give Contractor written notice listing cause(s) of the rejection. Contractor will set a time for completion of incomplete or defective work acceptable to ODR. Contractor shall complete or correct all work so designated prior to requesting a second Substantial Completion inspection If Owner s inspection team determines that the Work is not complete at the final inspection, ODR or A/E will give Contractor written notice listing the cause(s) of the rejection. Contractor will set a time for completion of incomplete or defective work acceptable to ODR. Contractor shall complete or correct all Work so designated prior to again requesting a final inspection The Contract contemplates three (3) comprehensive inspections: the Substantial Completion inspection, the Final Completion inspection, and the inspection of completed final Punchlist items. The cost to Owner of additional inspections 40

44 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects resulting from the Work not being ready for one or more of these inspections is the responsibility of Contractor. Owner may issue a ULCO deducting these costs from Final Payment. Upon Contractor s written request, Owner will furnish documentation of any costs so deducted. Work added to the Contract by Change Order after Substantial Completion inspection is not corrective Work for purposes of determining timely completion, or assessing the cost of additional inspections Phased Completion. The Contract may provide, or Project conditions may warrant, as determined by ODR, that designated elements or parts of the Work be completed in phases. Where phased completion is required or specifically agreed to by the parties, the provisions of the Contract related to closing inspections, occupancy, and acceptance apply independently to each designated element or part of the Work. For all other purposes, unless otherwise agreed by the parties in writing, Substantial Completion of the Work as a whole is the date on which the last element or part of the Work completed receives a Substantial Completion certificate. Final Completion of the Work as a whole is the date on which the last element or part of the Work completed receives a Final Completion certificate or notice Owner s Right of Occupancy. Owner may occupy or use all or any portion of the Work following Substantial Completion, or at any earlier stage of completion. Should Owner wish to use or occupy the Work, or part thereof, prior to Substantial Completion, ODR will notify Contractor in writing and identify responsibilities for security, insurance and maintenance Work performed on the premises by third parties on Owner s behalf does not constitute occupation or use of the Work by Owner for purposes of this Article. All Work performed by Contractor after occupancy, whether in part or in whole, shall be at the convenience of Owner so as to not disrupt Owner s use of, or access to occupied areas of the Project Acceptance and Payment Request for Final Payment. Following the certified completion of all work, including all final Punchlist items, cleanup, and the delivery of record documents, Contractor shall submit a certified Application for Final Payment and include all sums held as retainage and forward to A/E and ODR for review and approval Final Payment Documentation. Contractor shall submit, prior to or with the Application for Final Payment, final copies of all Close-Out documents, maintenance and operating instructions, guarantees and warranties, certificates, Record Documents and all other items required by the Contract. Contractor shall submit evidence of return of access keys and cards, evidence of delivery to Owner of attic stock, spare parts, and other specified materials. Contractor shall submit consent of surety to Final Payment form and an affidavit that all payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, subcontracted work and other indebtedness connected with the Work, except as specifically noted, are paid, will be paid, after payment from Owner or otherwise satisfied within the period of time required by Tex. Gov t Code, Chapter Contractor shall furnish documentation establishing payment or satisfaction of all such obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of claims and liens arising out of the Contract. Contractor may not subsequently submit a claim on behalf of Subcontractor or vendor unless Contractor s affidavit notes that claim as an exception Architect/Engineer Approval. A/E will review a submitted Application for Final Payment promptly but in no event later than ten (10) days after its receipt. Prior to the expiration of this deadline, A/E will either: 1) return the Application for Final Payment to Contractor with corrections for action and resubmission; or 2) accept it, note their approval, and send to Owner Offsets and Deductions. Owner may deduct from the Final Payment all sums due from Contractor. If the Certificate of Final Completion notes any Work remaining, incomplete, or defects not remedied, Owner may deduct the cost of remedying such deficiencies from the 41

45 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects Final Payment. On such deductions, Owner will identify each deduction, the amount, and the explanation of the deduction on or by the twenty-first (21 st ) day after Owner s receipt of an approved Application for Final Payment. Such offsets and deductions shall be incorporated via a final Change Order, including a ULCO as may be applicable Final Payment Due. Final Payment is due and payable by Owner, subject to all allowable offsets and deductions, on the thirtieth (30 th ) day following Owner s approval of the Application for Payment. If Contractor disputes any amount deducted by Owner, Contractor shall give notice of the dispute on or before the thirtieth (30 th ) day following receipt of Final Payment. Failure to do so will bar any subsequent claim for payment of amounts deducted Effect of Final Payment. Final Payment constitutes a waiver of all claims by Owner, relating to the condition of the Work except those arising from: Faulty or defective Work appearing after Substantial Completion (latent defects); Failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; Terms of any warranties required by the Contract, or implied by law; or Claims arising from personal injury or property damage to third parties Waiver of Claims. Final payment constitutes a waiver of all claims and liens by Contractor except those specifically identified in writing and submitted to ODR prior to the application for Final Payment Effect on Warranty. Regardless of approval and issuance of Final Payment, the Contract is not deemed fully performed by Contractor and closed until the expiration of all warranty periods. Article 13. Warranty and Guarantee 13.1 Contractor s General Warranty and Guarantee. Contractor warrants to Owner that all Work is executed in accordance with the Contract, complete in all parts and in accordance with approved practices and customs, and of the required finish and workmanship. Contractor further warrants that unless otherwise specified, all materials and equipment incorporated in the Work under the Contract are new. Owner may, at its option, agree in writing to waive any failure of the Work to conform to the Contract, and to accept a reduction in the Contract price for the cost of repair or diminution in value of the Work by reason of such defect. Absent such a written agreement, Contractor s obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents is absolute and is not waived by any inspection or observation by Owner, A/E or others, by making any progress payment or final payment, by the use or occupancy of the Work or any portion thereof by Owner, at any time, or by any repair or correction of such defect made by Owner Warranty Period. Except as may be otherwise specified or agreed, Contractor shall repair all defects in materials, equipment, or workmanship appearing within one year from the date of Substantial Completion of the Work. If Substantial Completion occurs by phase, then the warranty period for that the Work performed for each phase begins on the date of Substantial Completion of that phase, or as otherwise stipulated on the Certificate of Substantial Completion for the particular phase Limits on Warranty. Contractor s warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by: Modification or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors, or any other individual or entity for whom Contractor is not responsible, unless Owner is compelled to undertake maintenance or operation due to the neglect of 42

46 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects Contractor Normal wear and tear under normal usage after acceptance of the Work by Owner Events Not Affecting Warranty. Contractor s obligation to perform and complete the Work in a good and workmanlike manner in accordance with the Contract Documents is absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or relieve the Contractor from its obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: Observations by Owner and/or A/E; Recommendation to pay any progress or final payment by A/E; The issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by Owner to Contractor under the Contract Documents; Use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner; Any acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so; Any review of a Shop Drawing or sample submittal; or Any inspection, test or approval by others Separate Warranties. If a particular piece of equipment or component of the Work for which the Contract requires a separate warranty is placed in continuous service before Substantial Completion, the warranty period for that equipment or component will not begin until Substantial Completion, regardless of any warranty agreements in place between suppliers and/or Subcontractors and Contractor. ODR will certify the date of service commencement in the Substantial Completion certificate In addition to Contractor s warranty and duty to repair, Contractor expressly assumes all warranty obligations required under the Contract for specific building components, systems and equipment Contractor may satisfy any such obligation by obtaining and assigning to Owner a complying warranty from a manufacturer, supplier, or Subcontractor. Where an assigned warranty is tendered and accepted by Owner which does not fully comply with the requirements of the Contract, Contractor remains liable to Owner on all elements of the required warranty not provided by the assigned warranty Correction of Defects. Upon receipt of written notice from Owner, or any agent of Owner designated as responsible for management of the warranty period, of the discovery of a defect, Contractor shall promptly remedy the defect(s), and provide written notice to Owner and designated agent indicating action taken. In case of emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage to Owner, or if Contractor fails to remedy within thirty (30) days, or within another period agreed to in writing, Owner may correct the defect and be reimbursed the cost of remedying the defect from Contractor or its surety. Article 14. Suspension and Termination 14.1 Suspension of Work for Cause. Owner may, at any time without prior notice, suspend all or any part of the Work if, after reasonable observation and/or investigation, Owner determines it is necessary to do so to prevent or correct any condition of the Work which constitutes an immediate safety hazard or which may reasonably be expected to impair the integrity, usefulness or longevity of the Work when 43

47 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects completed Owner will give Contractor a written notice of suspension for cause, setting forth the reason for the suspension and identifying the Work suspended. Upon receipt of such notice, Contractor shall immediately stop the Work so identified. As soon as practicable following the issuance of such a notice, Owner will initiate and complete a further investigation of the circumstances giving rise to the suspension, and issue a written determination of the findings If it is confirmed that the cause was within the control of Contractor, Contractor will not be entitled to an extension of time for delay resulting from the suspension. If the cause is determined not to have been within the control of Contractor, and the suspension has prevented Contractor from completing the Work within the Contract Time, the suspension is an excusable delay and a time extension will be granted through a Change Order Suspension of Work under this provision will be no longer than is reasonably necessary to remedy the conditions giving rise to the suspension Suspension of Work for Owner s Convenience. Upon seven (7) days written notice to Contractor, Owner may at any time without breach of the Contract suspend all or any portion of the Work for a period of up to sixty (60) days for its own convenience. Owner will give Contractor a written notice of suspension for convenience, which sets forth the number of suspension days for which the Work, or any portion of it, and the date on which the suspension of Work will cease. When such a suspension prevents Contractor from completing the Work within the Contract Time, it is an excusable delay. A notice of suspension for convenience may be modified by Owner at any time on seven (7) days written notice to Contractor. If Owner suspends the Work for its convenience for more than sixty (60) consecutive days, Contractor may elect to terminate the Contract pursuant to the provisions of the Contract Termination by Owner for Cause Upon thirty (30) days written notice to Contractor and its surety, Owner may, without prejudice to any right or remedy, terminate the Contract and take possession of the Site and of all materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment, and machinery thereon owned by Contractor under any of the following circumstances: Persistent or repeated failure or refusal, except during complete or partial suspensions of work authorized under the Contract, to supply enough properly skilled workmen or proper materials; Persistent disregard of laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction, including ODR; Persistent failure to prosecute the Work in accordance with the Contract, and to ensure its completion within the time, or any approved extension thereof, specified in the Contract; Failure to remedy defective work condemned by ODR; Failure to pay Subcontractors, laborers, and material suppliers pursuant to Tex. Gov t Code, Chapter 2251; Persistent endangerment to the safety of labor or of the Work; Failure to supply or maintain statutory bonds or to maintain required insurance, pursuant to the Contract; 44

48 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects Any material breach of the Contract; or Contractor s insolvency, bankruptcy, or demonstrated financial inability to perform the Work Failure by Owner to exercise the right to terminate in any instance is not a waiver of the right to do so in any other instance Upon receipt of a termination notice, the Contractor or its Surety has thirty (30) days to cure the reasons for the termination or demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Owner that it is prepared to remedy to the condition(s) upon which the notice of termination was based with diligence and promptness. If the Owner is satisfied that the Contractor or its Surety can remedy the reasons for the termination and complete the Work as required, the notice of termination shall be rescinded in writing by the Owner and the Work shall continue without an extension of time If at the conclusion of the thirty (30) day cure period the Contractor or its Surety is unable to demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Owner its ability to remedy the reasons for termination, the Owner may immediately terminate the employment of the Contractor, make alternative arrangements for completion of the Work and deduct the cost of completion from the unpaid Contract Sum Owners cost to complete the Work includes, but is not limited to, fees for additional services by A/E and other consultants, and additional contract administration costs Owner will make no further payment to Contractor or its surety unless the costs to complete the Work are less than the Contract balance, then the difference shall be paid to Contractor or its surety. If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, Contractor or its surety will pay the difference to Owner This obligation for payment survives the termination of the Contract Owner reserves the right in termination for cause to take assignment of all the Contracts between Contractor and its Subcontractors, vendors, and suppliers. ODR will promptly notify Contractor of the contracts Owner elects to assume. Upon receipt of such notice, Contractor shall promptly take all steps necessary to effect such assignment Conversion to Termination for Convenience. In the event that any termination of Contractor for cause under Section 14.3 is later determined to have been improper, the termination shall automatically convert to a termination for convenience under Section 14.5 and Contractor s recovery for termination shall be strictly limited to the payments allowable under Section Termination for Convenience of Owner. Owner reserves the right, without breach, to terminate the Contract prior to, or during the performance of the Work, for any reason. Upon such an occurrence, the following shall apply: Owner will notify Contractor and A/E in writing specifying the reason for and the effective date of the Contract termination. The notice may also contain instructions necessary for the protection, storage or decommissioning of incomplete work or systems, and for safety Upon receipt of the notice of termination, Contractor shall immediately proceed with the following obligations, regardless of any dispute in determining or adjusting any amounts due at that point in the Contract: 45

49 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects Stop all work Place no further subcontracts or orders for materials or services Terminate all subcontracts for convenience Cancel all materials and equipment orders as applicable Take appropriate action that is necessary to protect and preserve all property related to the Contract which is in the possession of Contractor When the Contract is terminated for Owner s convenience, Contractor may recover from Owner payment for all Work executed. Contractor may not claim lost profits or lost business opportunities Termination By Contractor. If the Work is stopped for a period of ninety (90) days under an order of any court or other public authority having jurisdiction, or as a result of an act of government, such as a declaration of a national emergency making materials unavailable, through no act or fault of Contractor or Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing any of the Work under a contract with Contractor, then Contractor may, upon thirty (30) additional days written notice to ODR, terminate the Contract and recover from Owner payment for all Work executed, but not lost profits or lost business opportunities. If the cause of the Work stoppage is removed prior to the end of the thirty (30) day notice period, Contractor may not terminate the Contract Settlement on Termination. When the Contract is terminated for any reason, at any time prior to one hundred eighty (180) days after the effective date of termination, Contractor shall submit a final termination settlement proposal to Owner based upon recoverable costs as provided under the Contract. If Contractor fails to submit the proposal within the time allowed, Owner may unilaterally determine the amount due to Contractor because of the termination and pay the determined amount to Contractor. Article 15. Dispute Resolution 15.1 Unresolved Contractor Disputes. To the extent that it is applicable, the dispute resolution process provided for in Tex. Gov t Code, Chapter 2260, shall be used by Contractor to resolve any claim for breach of Contract made by Contractor that is not resolved under procedures described in these Uniform General Conditions or Owner s Special Conditions of the Contract Alternative Dispute Resolution Process. Owner may establish a dispute resolution process to be utilized in advance of that outlined in Tex. Gov t Code, Chapter Nothing herein shall hinder, prevent, or be construed as a waiver of Owner s right to seek redress on any disputed matter in a court of competent jurisdiction In any litigation between the Owner and the Contractor arising from this Contract or this Project, neither party will be entitled to an award of legal fees or costs in any judgment regardless which one is deemed the prevailing party Nothing herein shall waive or be construed as a waiver of the State s sovereign immunity. Article 16. Certification of No Asbestos Containing Material or Work 16.1 Contractor shall insure that Texas Department of State Health Services licensed individuals, consultants or companies are used for any required asbestos work including asbestos inspection, asbestos abatement plans/specifications, asbestos abatement, asbestos project management and thirdparty asbestos monitoring. 46

50 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects 16.2 Contractor shall provide a notarized certification to Owner that all equipment and materials used in fulfillment of its Contract responsibilities are non-asbestos Containing Building Materials (ACBM). This certification must be provided no later than Contractor s application for Final Payment The Contractor shall insure compliance with the following acts from all of his subcontractors and assigns: Article 17 Miscellaneous Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (AHERA 40 CFR (7)); National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP EPA 40 CFR 61, Subpart M National Emission Standard for Asbestos; Texas Asbestos Health Protection Rules (TAHPR Tex. Admin. Code Title 25, Part 1, Ch. 295C, Asbestos Health Protection 17.1 Owner s Special Conditions. When the Work contemplated by Owner is of such a character that the foregoing Uniform General Conditions of the Contract cannot adequately cover necessary and additional contractual relationships, the Contract may include Owner s Special Conditions that relate to the Project. In the event of a conflict between the UTUGCs and the Owner s Special Conditions, the Owner s Special Conditions will govern Federally Funded Projects. On Federally funded projects, Owner may waive, suspend or modify any Article in these Uniform General Conditions which conflicts with any Federal statue, rule, regulation or procedure, where such waiver, suspension or modification is essential to receipt by Owner of such Federal funds for the Project. In the case of any Project wholly financed by Federal funds, any standards required by the enabling Federal statute, or any Federal rules, regulations or procedures adopted pursuant thereto, shall be controlling Internet-based Project Management Systems. At its option, Owner may administer its design and construction management through an Internet-based management system. In such cases, Contractor shall conduct communication through this media and perform all Project related functions utilizing this database system. This includes correspondence, submittals, Requests for Information, vouchers or payment requests and processing, amendment, Change Orders and other administrative activities Accessibility and Administration When used, Owner will make the software accessible via the Internet to all Project team members Owner shall administer the software Training. When used, Owner shall provide training to the Project team members Right to Audit Contractor understands that acceptance of funds under this Contract acts as acceptance of the authority of the State Auditor s Office, Owner, any successor agency and their representatives, including independent auditors, to conduct an audit or investigation in connection with those funds. Contractor further agrees to cooperate fully with any party conducting the audit or investigation, including providing all records requested Contractor shall maintain and retain supporting fiscal and any other documents relevant to showing that any payments under this Contract funds were expended in accordance with the terms of this Contact, the requirements of Owner, and with the laws and regulations of the State of Texas including, but not limited to, requirements of the Comptroller of the State of 47

51 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects Texas and the State Auditor. Contractor shall maintain all such documents and other records relating to this Contract and Owner s property for a period of four (4) years after the date of submission of a request for Final Payment or until a resolution of all billing questions, whichever is later. Contractor shall make available at reasonable times and upon reasonable notice and for reasonable periods all documents and other information related to the Work of this Contract Contractor shall ensure that this clause concerning the authority to audit funds received indirectly by subcontractors through the Contractor and the requirement to cooperate is included in any subcontract it awards. End of Uniform General Conditions 48

52 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Construction Projects REVISIONS DATE REVISED INITIALS Uniform General and Supplementary Conditions merged into and Reissued as new document: 2013 Uniform General Conditions for UT System Building Construction Projects (UTUGCs); Special Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions deleted from Definitions; Owner s Special Conditions added to Definitions; Para , Indemnification, moved to new Para. 3.4; Para added Asbestos Transportation Insurance Coverage; Para added Umbrella Insurance Coverage; Para. 13.7, Certification of No Asbestos Containing Material moved to renamed Article 16 and revised; Article 15, Dispute Resolution, revised; Existing Article 16, Miscellaneous, re-numbered as Article

53 APPENDIX C SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1.1 General These Special Conditions are in addition to the requirements of the 2013 Uniform General and Supplementary General Conditions for University of Texas System Building Construction Contracts, and are a part of the contract documents. Special conditions are unique to UTHealth projects but shall not weaken the character or intent of the Uniform General Conditions 1.2 Definitions See 2013 Uniform General and Supplementary Conditions 1.3 Safety Plans /Briefings Contractor shall comply with OSHA requirements at all times. Contractor will submit a project specific safety (see attachment C sample checklist) plan to the ODR/EHS prior to the preconstruction meeting. Contractor shall include in the safety plan any activities that present a potential risk to pedestrians, university occupants or property that includes appropriate fencing of the job site, signage and schedule of activities. If traffic or egress is altered the safety plan shall include a traffic control or egress plan. The Contractor is responsible for all associated cost to include engineering, obtaining required City and TMC permits, signage, construction tape, traffic cones, etc. If additional project specific risks are identified and/or requested from EHS, the contactor will submit additional safety plans as requested. Prime contractors shall attend and receive a copy of the UTHealth safety orientation administered by EHS prior to mobilization. Prime contractors will review the presentation with sub-contractor superintendents, supervisors and lead men. This presentation is general requirements for UTHealth and does not serve as or substitute the contractors project specific safety plan. Safety training will be recorded in a log and will take place prior to the subcontractors performing work. 1.4 Safe Working Environment/Housekeeping Contractor is to provide a safe working environment to include storage of power tools/extension cords and disposal rubbish, excess materials and other tripping hazards. Storage of trash in mechanical chases or rooms is strictly prohibited. Lunch breaks or other authorized breaks are to be taken in designated areas. Storage of construction materials will be coordinated with the ODR/PM. 1.5 Hot works and Shutdowns Hot works, utility shutdowns, system impairments or blocking of egress will be coordinated well in advance through the ODR/PM. Any smoke or dust that may result in activation of the fire alarm system will be considered a system shutdown so preventive measures can be taken. 1.6 Asbestos Abatement In the event the contractor encounters material reasonably believed to be asbestos at the project site, the contractor shall immediately stop work in the area affected and report the condition to APPENDIX C -SPECIAL CONDITIONS ITB XXX-XXXX Project Name Page 1 of 4

54 the owner. If in fact the material is asbestos and has not been abated, the contractor shall not resume the asbestos-related work in the affected area until the asbestos has been abated. 1.7 Disruptive Activities Proposals shall include whatever cost necessary to prevent disruptive activities (dust, noise and odors) from 7am to 6pm without written approval from the ODR/PM. Contractors will use designated routes to and from job sites and keep noise to a minimum. The use of any portable electronic devices, MP3 players, radios, etc, is strictly forbidden. Harassment, sleeping and smoking are forbidden. Harassment includes any action such as jeering, whistling, calling-out, staring, snickering, making rude or questionable comments, or similar behavior. If after hours work is required, the UT Police and Facilities Work Control must be notified. 1.8 ID Badges Contractors must obtain and wear UTHSC-H ID badges at all times. A consolidated list of ID badges will be requested through the ODR/PM who will submit a copy of the request to the school/bldg mgmt for approval. The badge request form will be ed directly to the Bursar s office. The contractor will be notified when their badges are ready for pick up on the 22 nd floor of the University Center Towers, 7000 Fannin Street. Contractors will be charged a $15.00 fee for each badge. ID badge the requests will include which workers will be authorized ID badge access, the specific doors and duration. Normally only construction project managers, supervisors and design teams will be authorized ID badge access and then only to doors that are required to access the job site and only for the duration of the project. Perimeter access to the building should only be required if the work is scheduled after hours or a door that is normally locked must be used. At completion of the project the ODR/PM will collect the ID badges and insure card reader access is de-activated. If no further work is anticipated the badges will be returned to the UTHSC-H ID badge department. 1.9 Keys If a room key is required an with authorization from the ODR/PM, School Admin and UTPD will be required. The PM will have the contractor sign for the key and collect/return the key to its place or origin, after the project is complete. Doors will not be propped open at any time. Building master keys will normally not be issued to contractors. If a room is to be vacated for construction the Contractor will coordinate through the ODR/PM to have a temporary core installed for security. If the room is occupied, the ODR/PM will coordinate someone to allow access to the room for short duration projects. An inventory or digital pictures shall be taken by the PM before and after construction Entry and Exit Routes Only doors and routes identified at the pre-construction meeting will be used. Contractor shall schedule all necessary material stocking, demolition and trash removal through school corridors APPENDIX C -SPECIAL CONDITIONS ITB XXX-XXXX Project Name Page 2 of 4

55 and elevators during non-peak hours, as approved by the ODR/PM. All materials will be brought into the building through the loading dock and transported using the service elevator. The loading dock is only to be used for loading and unloading. The loading dock will not be used for parking. Vehicles left unattended will be towed at the expense of the owner Project Parking Free parking on campus/at the project site is not available unless other wise specified by the ODR/PM. Arrange for parking with the UTHealth Parking Office, Texas Medical Center Parking or other parking facilities Security The contractor is responsible for security of the project and project materials. The contractor, at its own expense, may employ unarmed security personnel for the project. Security firms and personnel must be approved by The University of Texas Police Department Protection of Work The contractor and every sub-contractor shall properly and effectively protect all project materials and equipment, both during and after installation. Project products and the contractor's tools and equipment may be stored on the premises if adequate space is available but the placing shall be within areas approved by the owner. When any room in the building is used as a shop, store room, etc., the contractor shall be held responsible for any repairs, patching or cleaning arising from such use. All damaged landscape will be restored to the same conditions prior to mobilization. The contractor shall protect and be responsible for any damage to its work or material, from the date of the agreement until the final payment is made, and shall make good without cost to the owner, any damage or loss that may occur during this period. All material affected by weather shall be covered and protected to keep free from damage while they are being transported to the site and while stored on the site. During the execution of the work, open ends of all piping and conduit, and all openings in equipment shall be capped and sealed prior to completion of final connections, so as to prevent the entrance of foreign matter. All drains shall be covered until placed in service to prevent the entrance of foreign matter MEP Work Close coordination with the ODR/PM and the Facilities Maintenance Department will be made prior to conducting any MEP work. The contractor shall be responsible for providing qualified personnel to operate machinery, equipment or systems (HVAC, electrical, automatic sprinkler, etc.). Each system start up and shut down must be authorization by the ODR/PM and supervised by the Facilities Maintenance Department. Contractors performing MEP repair work or new construction on machinery or building equipment are required to lock out and tag the starting switches and all energy isolation devices, i.e., valves with DO NOT OPERATE tags, (Including Contractor name and date), and to inform the ODR/PM that the power has temporarily been locked out. APPENDIX C -SPECIAL CONDITIONS ITB XXX-XXXX Project Name Page 3 of 4

56 Each contractor shall provide sleeves for all service lines, including piping and conduit, covered in their scope of work, which may pass through walls, roof or floors and consult with the ODR/PM and A/E prior to commencement Commissioning The general contractor is solely responsible for coordinating and demonstrating commissioning activities and will witness all commissioning and inspection activities. This responsibility shall not be delegated to subcontractors, but by necessity will require the participation of subcontractors. At a minimum adding or modification of the following systems will require documented commissioned and/or testing: fire alarm and suppression system, building controls, plumbing, HVAC, lighting, power delivery and security systems. Contractor will give the owner s team 5 days notice so the team can be available to witness and participate in commissioning activities. Immediately after NTP, the contractor will work with the owner to develop the commissioning plan. The owner will furnish templates with sample test/checklists for use by the contractor in development of the commission plan/book. The commission plan/book will be kept on site. The completed copy will be given to the owner at the end of the project Changes, Schedules and Record Documentation Proposed Change Orders (PCOs) will be submitted using (Attachment B) the UTHealth Project Management Office Change in Work Cost Analysis Form. A sample of the form is attached. A project schedule shall be created and maintained in accordance with the UGSGC using MS Project. Close-out Documents shall consist of 2 hard copies and 1 electronic PDF copy of: contractor marked-up As-Built or As Constructed drawings, approved submittals, shop drawings, commissioning and inspection forms, O&M manuals, general and extended warranties, final releases of claims and liens, affidavit of payment of debt and claims and consent of surety. Additional instructions may be given in the division 1 specification however the omission of any of these items in the specification does not relieve the contractor of their responsibility to provide all of the above mentioned documents prior to final payment. APPENDIX C -SPECIAL CONDITIONS ITB XXX-XXXX Project Name Page 4 of 4

57 ATTACHMENT A PREVAILING WAGE DETERMINATION HOUSTON/GALVESTON AREA The University of Texas System Office of Facilities Planning and Construction Date: June 30, 2015 Construction Type: Building Area: Houston-Galveston Building Construction Trade Classification Prevailing Wage Rate Carpenter $15.00 Concrete Finisher $15.75 Drywall/Ceiling Installer $14.50 Electrician $17.00 Elevator Mechanic $30.04 Fire Proofing Installer $15.00 Flooring Installer $20.00 Glazier $16.91 Heavy Equipment Operator $16.00 Ironworker $17.00 Laborer $10.50 Light Equip Operator/Driver $15.00 Mason/Bricklayer $18.00 Painter $14.25 Pipefitter $17.72 Piping/Ductwork Insulator $15.00 Plumber $19.99 Roofer $14.00 Sheetmetal Worker $18.00 Sprinkler Fitter $19.20 Tile Setter $15.00 Waterproofer $15.00 Notes: 1. Wages shown are for entry level, minimum wages for each classification and do not include fringe benefits. 2. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may not be added after award. The job classifications are not inclusive of all possible trades on the construction project. 3. It is the responsibility of the contractor to classify the worker in accordance with the published classifications and demonstrate that workers are paid commensurate with determined rates. 1

58 Attachment B Change in Work - Cost Analysis Form UTHealth Project Management Office (Prime Contractor to include, as backup, a completed form for each subcontractor(s) showing cost of work breakdown of labor, materials and equipment and bring forward all subcontractor(s) marked-up totals under the Subcontract heading along with costs of work for their own forces, if any, on this form) Project No. & Name: Contractor Name: Description of Change: : EXAMPLE PROJECT CHANGE Change Proposal No. Means Code Description A Quantity B Unit C Unit Cost (A*C) = (D+E) D Labor E Material & Equipment F Subcontract Job built column forms (14' x 24" x 24" columns) 1,120 SFCA $ 5.99 $ 5,903 $ 806 $ - N/A 1/4" Chamfer Strips 1,120 Lft $ 0.28 $ 200 $ 115 $ 960 N/A Form release agent 1,120 SFCA $ 0.13 $ 100 $ 50 $ 960 N/A Reinforcing Steel Supplier (See attched back-up) 1 LS $ 1.00 $ - $ - $ Concrete accessories (galvanized bolsters) 11 CLft $ $ - $ 426 $ - N/A Reinforcing Steel Installer (See attched back-up) 0 LS $ 1.00 $ - $ - $ psi Concrete 42 CYd $ $ - $ 3,192 $ Place 4000 psi Concrete 42 CYd $ $ 1,467 $ - $ Filed Engineeing Layout 0.2 Wk $ $ 234 $ - $ - 0 $ - $ - $ - $ - 0 $ - $ - $ - $ - 0 $ - $ - $ - $ - $ $ - $ - $ - $ - 0 $ - $ - $ - $ - 0 $ - $ - $ - $ - 0 $ - $ - $ - $ - 0 $ - $ - $ - $ - 0 $ - $ - $ - $ - 0 $ - $ - $ - $ - 0 $ - $ - $ - $ - 0 $ - $ - $ - $ - 0 $ - $ - $ - $ - 0 $ - $ - $ - $ - 0 $ - $ - $ - $ - 0 $ - $ - $ - $ - 0 $ - $ - $ - $ - 0 $ - $ - $ - $ - SUBTOTAL $ 7,904 $ 4,589 $ 3,205 Work perfomed by the Contractor's own employees (per UGC) Work up to $10,000.00, add 15.0% Work between $10, and $20,000.00, add 10.0% Work greater than $20,000.00, add 7.5% SUBTOTAL $ $ $ $ 12,493-1,249 - Managing subcontracted work (per UGC) SUBTOTAL Work up to $10,000.00, add 10.0% Work between $10, and $20,000.00, add 7.5% Work greater than $20,000.00, add 5.0% TOTAL FOR THIS CHANGE PROPOSAL * $ $ $ $ $ 3, ,268

59 PMO V Attachment C Sample project specific safety plan/job hazard analysis checklist Below is a sample checklist that may be used to develop project specific safety plans. For more details, please reference OSHA 29 CFR Components should be included as applicable along with signatures confirming that contractors have been trained according to OSHA regulations for the specific topic Listing of Key Personnel or Project Directory Hazard Communication Plan Site Logistics Plan to include: o Alterations to egress o Temporary construction barriers o Signage requirements o Designated staging area o Port o lets/restroom access and handwashing units o Dumpster, delivery and other traffic control routes o Storage of hazardous materials o First aid and water stations Hazardous Materials Safety Data Sheets, Quantities and Description of Use Hazard Assessment to include, but is not limited to, the safety concern checklist on the following page Personal Protective Equipment Hot Works and Fire Impairment Plan o Submitting permits and notifications o Isolation of points o Fire watch o Proper access to fire notification and suppression equipment Scaffolding Plan Excavation & Trenching Plan Crane Safety & Rigging Plan Fall Protection Plan Confined Space Plan Injury Reporting Plan and Identified Emergency Care Facility Emergency and Severe Weather Plans or Emergency Action Plan o Securing job site (tools, equipment, hazmat) o Evacuation o Return to work Contractor shall identify, coordinate UTHealth and plan for all interim life safety measures (ISLM), utility shutdowns, hot works, and infection control measures, mitigation of noise, dust and odors. 1

60 PMO V This list may not be all inclusive. Contractors are expected to comply with OSHA regulations and UTHealth Policy. Examples of Safety Concerns to include: Arc Flash Asbestos Atmospheric Conditions Burns Confined Space Dust Falls to Lower Level Flying Debris Health Hazards Hot Work/Fire Impairment Housekeeping and Storage Requirements LOTO Noise Poor Lighting Slip/Trip Hazards Traffic Control Uneven Surfaces Ventilation Requirements Wet Surface Conditions Working at Heights Working with High Voltage Equipment 2

61 SECTION SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES UT Health Science Center Houston PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. The Contractor's requests for changes in the products, materials, or equipment required by the Contract Documents are considered requests for "substitutions" and are subject to the requirements specified herein. The following are not considered as substitutions. 1. Revisions to the Contract Documents, where requested by the Owner, Architect or Engineer are considered as "changes", not substitutions. 2. Substitutions requested during the bidding period, which have been accepted prior to the Contract Date, are included in the Contract Documents and are not subject to the requirements for substitutions as herein specified. 3. Specified Contractor options on products and construction methods included in the Contract Documents are choices available to the Contractor and are not subject to the requirements for substitutions as herein specified. 4. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and orders as issued by governing authorities do not constitute "Substitutions" and do not constitute a basis for Change Orders. 1.2 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Requests for substitutions must be fully documented and be from the General Contractor only. Substitution requests received directly from subcontractors, material suppliers, manufacturers, and parties other than the General Contractor, will not be acknowledged. 1. Requests for substitution, received by the Architect later than 15 days after "Notice To Proceed" or "Date of Commencement of the Work" (whichever occurs first), will result in additional costs to the Owner. Contractor agrees to reimburse the Owner through deductive Change Order to the Contract, for all costs associated with such requests. B. The Contractor's request for a substitution will be received and considered when such substitution does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, when the proposed substitutions comply with the Contract Documents, when the requests are timely, fully documented and properly submitted, and when, one or more of the following conditions is satisfied, all as judged by the Architect; otherwise the requests will be returned without action except to record non-compliance with these requirements. 1. The Architect will consider a request for substitution where the request is directly related to an "or equal" clause or similar language in the Contract Documents. 2. The Architect will consider a request for substitution where the specified product or method cannot be provided within the Contract time. However, the request will not be considered if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of the Contractor's failure to pursue the work promptly or to coordinate the various activities properly. 3. The Architect will consider a request for a substitution where the specified product or method does not comply with requirements of governing authorities. 4. The Architect will consider a request for a substitution where a substantial advantage is offered the Owner, in terms of cost, time, energy conservation or other considerations or merit, after deducting offsetting responsibilities the Owner may be required to bear. These additional responsibilities may include such considerations as additional compensation to the Architect for redesign and evaluation services, the increased cost of other work by the Owner or by Owner's separate contractors, and similar considerations. 5. The Architect will consider a request for substitution when the specified product or method cannot be provided in a manner which is compatible with other materials of the Work or cannot be properly coordinated with other materials in the Work, and where the Contractor certifies that the substitution will comply with all other requirements of the Work and that the proposed substitution can be properly coordinated. 95% Construction Documents SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

62 C. The Contractor's submittal of and the Architect's acceptance of shop drawings, product data or samples which relate to work not complying with requirements of the Contract Documents, does not constitute an acceptable or valid request for a substitution, nor approval thereof. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Request Submittal: Submit 3 copies of each request for substitution in form identical to that included in Division 00. In each request identify the product, fabrication, and installation method to be replaced by the substitution; include related Specification Section and Drawing numbers, and complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions. Include the following information, as appropriate, with each request. 1. Provide samples where applicable or requested. 2. Provide a detailed comparison of the significant qualities including elements such as size, weight, durability, performance and visual effect where applicable. 3. Provide complete coordination information. Include all changes required in other elements of the Work to accommodate the substitution, including work performed by the Owner and separate contractors. 4. Provide complete cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any in the Contract sum. 5. After receipt of the Contractor's request for substitution, the Architect will notify the Contractor of either the acceptance or rejection of the proposed substitution. Acceptance of substitute products will be contingent upon submission of information specified herein as well as substantiating data, satisfactory to the Architect, that: a. There will be a Cost or Contract Completion Time advantage to the Owner. b. Item is equal to or better than the quality and serviceability of the specified product. c. Use of item will not entail changes in details and construction of related work. d. Item conforms to required design and artistic effect. e. The burden of proof shall be upon the Contractor. B. All requests for substitution must be received by the Architect no later than 15 days after the "Notice To Proceed" or "Date of Commencement of the Work" (whichever occurs first). Requests received later than 15 days will not be considered. C. Do not resubmit requests for substitution for products, materials, and equipment that have previously been rejected for this Project. No action will be taken on such requests. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION % Construction Documents SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

63 SECTION PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION UT Health Science Center Houston PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction activities included under various Sections of these Specifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included under different Sections of the Specifications that are dependent upon each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Where installation of one part of the Work is dependent on installation of other components, either before or after its own installation, schedule construction activities in the sequence required to obtain the best results. 2. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Where necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and attendance at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for the Owner and separate Contractors where coordination of their Work is required. C. Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of schedules. 2. Installation and removal of temporary facilities. 3. Delivery and processing of submittals. 4. Progress meetings. 5. Project Close-out activities. D. Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. 1.2 ACCEPTANCE OF PRIOR WORK: A. Require that each trade or subcontractor whose work is executed in relation to prior work to carefully inspect this prior work and submit written notice of any defects, improper workmanship or materials, or other conditions that would affect the satisfactory execution and permanency of his work. No further work shall be executed until such defects or conditions have been corrected or an agreement reached regarding defects which may develop due to conditions so noted. The absence of any such notifications will be construed as an acceptance by these trades or subcontractors of all prior related work, and later claims of defects in this work will not in any way relieve these trades or subcontractors from responsibility for correcting their work. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 95% Construction Documents PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

64 B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner if coordination of Owner s work is required. C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 9. Project closeout activities. 1.4 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. General: Submit Coordination Drawings to the Architect for information only. B. Prepare coordination drawings in accordance with requirements in individual Sections, where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity. 1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components. b. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems. c. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation. d. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls. e. Indicate required installation sequences. f. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. C. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows: 1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, fire alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work. 2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components. 3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, fire alarm, and electrical equipment. 4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. 5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items. 95% Construction Documents PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

65 6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following: a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems. b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment. c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork. 7. Electrical Work: Show the following: a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inch diameter and larger. b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire alarm locations. c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor control center locations. d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines. 8. Fire Protection System: Show the following: a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads. D. Coordination Drawing Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files in Portable Data File (PDF) format. 1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Drawings for use in preparing coordination digital data files. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to the Drawings. E. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of an Agreement form acceptable to the Owner and Architect. 1.5 KEY PERSONNEL A. Within 7 days of Notice to Proceed, submit a list of the Contractor's principal staff assignments, including the Superintendent and other personnel in attendance at the site; identify individuals, their duties and responsibilities; list their addresses and telephone numbers. 1. Post copies of the list in the Project meeting room, the temporary field office, and at each temporary telephone. 1.6 PROJECT MEETINGS A. Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within 3 days of the meeting. B. Representatives of contractor, subcontractors, and suppliers attending the meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of each entity represented. C. Architect/Engineer may attend meetings to ascertain that Work is expedited consistent with Contract Documents and the construction schedules. 1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. B. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 95% Construction Documents PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

66 C. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: 1. Tentative construction schedule. 2. Phasing. 3. Critical work sequencing. 4. Designation of responsible personnel. 5. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. 6. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. 7. Distribution of the Contract Documents. 8. Submittal procedures. 9. Preparation of Record Documents. 10. Use of the premises. 11. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. 12. Parking availability. 13. Office, work, and storage areas. 14. Equipment deliveries and priorities. 15. First aid. 16. Security. 17. Progress cleaning. 18. Working hours. 1.8 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCES A. Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. B. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates. C. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: 1. Contract Documents. 2. Options. 3. Related Change Orders. 4. Purchases. 5. Deliveries. 6. Submittals. 7. Review of mockups. 8. Possible conflicts. 9. Compatibility problems. 10. Time schedules. 11. Weather limitations. 12. Manufacturer's written recommendations. 13. Warranty requirements. 14. Compatibility of materials. 15. Acceptability of substrates. 16. Temporary facilities and controls. 17. Space and access limitations. 18. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 19. Testing and inspecting requirements. 20. Required performance results. 21. Protection of construction and personnel. D. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements. E. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. 95% Construction Documents PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

67 1.9 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. B. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. C. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. 1. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on schedule, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 2. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: a. Interface requirements. b. Sequence of operations. c. Status of submittals. d. Deliveries. e. Off-site fabrication. f. Access. g. Site utilization. h. Temporary facilities and controls. i. Work hours. j. Hazards and risks. k. Progress cleaning. l. Quality and work standards. m. Change Orders. n. Documentation of information for payment requests. D. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting and report. 1. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting COORDINATION MEETINGS A. Conduct Project coordination meetings at regular intervals. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences. B. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. C. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. 1. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss 95% Construction Documents PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

68 whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 2. Schedule Updating: Revise Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule after each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. 3. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the following: a. Interface requirements. b. Sequence of operations. c. Status of submittals. d. Deliveries. e. Off-site fabrication. f. Access. g. Site utilization. h. Temporary facilities and controls. i. Work hours. j. Hazards and risks. k. Progress cleaning. l. Quality and work standards. m. Change Orders. D. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs) A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will be returned with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in the Work. 3. Should the requested information already be available to the Contractor from a careful study and comparison of the Contract Documents, field conditions, other Owner-provided information, Contractor-prepared coordination drawings, or prior Project correspondence or documentation, the Architect will so advise Contractor by stating the location of the requested information and Owner may deduct the sum of $ from the Contract Sum, not as a penalty but as reimbursement for the Architect s time and effort devoted to research and handling. B. Content of the RFI: Include a brief description of the question, and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Architect s project number. 3. Owner s project number. 4. Date. 5. Name of Contractor. 6. Name of Architect. 7. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 8. A detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation 9. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 10. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 11. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 12. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 13. Contractor's signature. 14. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments. C. Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with content as indicated above. 1. Include attachments as electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. 95% Construction Documents PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

69 D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow at least seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. d. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. e. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors. f. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will start again. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response. E. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response. F. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular, hard-copy or electronic, log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Include the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. G. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION % Construction Documents PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

70 REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI) RFI NO: To: FKP Architects, Inc. 8 Greenway Plaza, Suite 300 Houston, Texas From: (Contractor) For the project identified at upper right corner of this page, we request the following interpretation: Drawing No.: Detail Ref: Specification Section: Article / Paragraph: Request: Contractor s Proposed Solution: Attachments Signed by: Date Architect s Response: Attachments Signed by: Date Received: Date Returned: PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

71 School of Nursing Levesl 5 & 6 Office Suite Renovation SECTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as action submittals. B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as informational submittals. C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files. D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format. 1.2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES GENERAL A. Submittals required in performance of the Work include, but are not limited to: 1. Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Submittal schedule. 3. Product List Schedule. 4. Daily construction reports. 5. Shop Drawings. 6. Product Data. 7. Samples. 8. Submittals for information. B. Arrange for all submittals to be transmitted electronically. 1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBMITTALS A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. 1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings. b. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of an Agreement form acceptable to the Owner and Architect. c. The following plot files will by furnished for each appropriate discipline: 1) Floor plans. 2) Reflected ceiling plans. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. 95% Construction Documents SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

72 School of Nursing Levesl 5 & 6 Office Suite Renovation 3. Processing: Allow sufficient review time so that installation will not be delayed as a result of the time required to process submittals, including time for resubmittals. a. The Architect will endeavor to process submittals within fifteen (15) working days. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. The Architect will promptly advise the Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. b. If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process the same as the initial submittal. c. Allow fifteen (15) working days for reprocessing each submittal. 4. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to the Architect sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing. C. Electronic Submittals Identification and Information: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. a. For file name, use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS ). Include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point for Resubmittals (e.g., LNHS A). 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 4. Include the following information on an inserted cover sheet: a. Project name. b. Date of submittal. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. f. Name of subcontractor. g. Name of supplier. h. Name of manufacturer. i. Number and title of appropriate Specification section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. l. Related physical samples submitted directly. m. Other necessary identification. 5. Include the following information as keywords in the electronic file metadata: a. Project name. b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. c. Manufacturer name. d. Product name. D. Hard Copy Submittal Preparation (Only where required): Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label or title block. 1. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches on the label or beside the title block on Shop Drawings to record the Contractor's review and approval markings and the action taken. a. Prior to forwarding to Architect, thoroughly check all submittals and affix Contractor's shop drawing stamp. Submittals received without the Contractor's approval stamp will be returned to the Contractor without action. 2. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action taken. a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 95% Construction Documents SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

73 School of Nursing Levesl 5 & 6 Office Suite Renovation E. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal from Contractor to Architect using a transmittal form. Submittals received from sources other than the Contractor will be returned without action. 1. Record relevant information and requests for data on the transmittal. On the form, record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations. Include Contractor's certification that information complies with Contract Document requirements. F. Action Submittals: Submit electronic submittals via as PDF electronic files. 1. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. G. Informational Submittals: Submit electronic submittals via as PDF electronic files. 1. Architect will not return file. H. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." I. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 1. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically-submitted certificates and certifications where indicated. a. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated. J. The Architect will take no action on Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples that have not first been certified, by stamped, signed notation, as having been checked and approved by the Contractor for use in the Work. 1. The Architect will not be responsible for deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents that are not specifically and clearly annotated as such on submittals. 1.4 ELECTRONIC SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1. Submit electronic submittals via as PDF electronic files. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 2. Where submittals are required and hardcopy documentation is unavoidable, submit one copy for Architect s review. a. Architect will review and annotate the hard copy as necessary. b. After review, the Architect will create an electronic copy of the annotated submittal and retain as an electronic Project Record Document file. c. Architect will return the annotated hard copy to the Contractor. 1.5 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples are required for all products. materials, and equipment to be included in the work. In those instances where Architect's review is not required, as defined below, the Contractor still must arrange for necessary submittals from his subcontractors and suppliers and coordinate the work of all parties involved. 1. Maintain all submittals at the Project Site for use during construction and for distribution to the Owner, through the Architect, upon completion of the work. 2. The Architect may review items of work included with each application for payment and will not recommend payment for specific items of work unless the appropriate submittals are on file at the Project Site. B. The Architect will not accept or review any submittals that contain Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). 95% Construction Documents SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

74 School of Nursing Levesl 5 & 6 Office Suite Renovation C. Where Contractor proposes to provide the exact manufacturer and product specified, no shop drawings, product data, or samples are required by the Architect for that item unless specifically required within the individual specification section. Similarly, where more than one manufacturer's product is listed and Contractor intends to provide one of the listed products, no shop drawings, product data, or samples are required by the Architect for that item unless specifically required within the individual specification section. 1. Refer to each individual specification section and submit shop drawings, product data, and samples for the products, materials, and equipment indicated. 2. The Architect will not accept or review shop drawings, product data, or samples unless specifically required in the referenced specification section. D. When the specification is based upon products of only one manufacturer with a list of other acceptable manufacturers, and Contractor proposes to provide an equivalent product by one of the listed acceptable manufacturers, follow procedures specified for Architect's review and action as specified herein, including number of copies required for distribution. E. When Contractor proposes to provide an equivalent product by a manufacturer not listed, follow procedures specified in Section for submittal of substitution requests. Provide submittals in accordance with the requirements of the individual technical specification section, and with this Section, only after receiving Architect's approval of substitution request. F. When specifications require that submittals be transmitted direct to a Consulting Engineer, provide one additional copy to the Architect for information purposes only. G. Administrative Submittals: Refer to other Division 01 Sections and other Contract Documents for requirements for administrative submittals. Such submittals include, but are not limited to: 1. Permits. 2. Applications for payment. 3. Performance and payment bonds. 4. Insurance certificates. 5. List of Subcontractors. 1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Certain submittals are required and listed in individual specification sections that do not require action by the Architect. These submittals are for Architect's records only. Such submittals include, but are not limited to: 1. Contractor s Coordination Drawings. 2. Material test reports by Testing Laboratory. 3. Completed work test reports by Testing Laboratory. 4. Material manufacturer's certifications. 5. Material manufacturer's preconstruction test reports. 6. Subcontractor s/installer s qualifications. 7. Daily Construction Reports. B. Coordination drawings are a special type of Submittal that show the relationship and integration of different construction elements that require careful coordination during fabrication or installation to fit in the space provided or function as intended. 1. Preparation of coordination Drawings is specified in Division 01 section "Project Management and Coordination" and may include components previously shown in detail on Shop Drawings or Product Data. 2. Submit Coordination Drawings for integration of different construction elements. Show sequences and relationships of separate components to avoid conflicts in use of space. 3. Architect s Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are the Contractor's responsibility. If the Architect determines that the coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, the Architect will so inform the Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit. 95% Construction Documents SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

75 School of Nursing Levesl 5 & 6 Office Suite Renovation 1.7 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. B. Submit within 15 days from "Notice To Proceed" or "Commencement of the Work", whichever occurs first. 1. Provide a separate time bar for each significant construction activity. Provide a continuous vertical line to identify the first working day of each week. Use the same breakdown of units of the Work as indicated in the "Schedule of Values". 2. Within each time bar indicate estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments. As Work progresses, place a contrasting mark in each bar to indicate Actual Completion. 3. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. Coordinate each element on the schedule with other construction activities; include minor elements involved in the sequence of the Work. Show each activity in proper sequence. Indicate graphically sequences necessary for completion of related portions of the Work. 4. Coordinate the Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests and other schedules. 5. Indicate completion in advance of the date established for Substantial Completion. Indicate Substantial Completion on the schedule to allow time for the Architect's procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. C. Phasing: Provide notations on the schedule to show how the sequence of the Work is affected by requirements for phased completion to permit Work by separate Contractors and partial occupancy by the Owner prior to Substantial Completion. D. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including testing and installation. E. Area Separations: Provide a separate time bar to identify each major construction area for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each element in an area must be sequenced or integrated with other activities. F. Cost Correlation: At the head of the schedule, provide a two item cost correlation line, indicating "precalculated" and "actual" costs. On the line show dollar-volume of Work performed as of the dates used for preparation of payment requests. G. Distribution: Following response to the initial submittal, distribute copies to the Architect, Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with scheduled dates. 1. Post copies in the Project meeting room and temporary field office. 2. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in construction activities. H. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity, where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. 1.8 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE A. After development and acceptance of the Contractor's construction schedule, prepare a complete schedule of submittals. Submit the schedule within 15 days of the date required for establishment of the Contractor's construction schedule. 1. Submit schedule in PDF electronic file format: 2. Coordinate submittal schedule with the list of subcontracts, schedule of values and the list of products as well as the Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Prepare the schedule in chronological order; include all submittals required throughout the course of the Work. Provide the following information: a. Scheduled date for the first submittal. b. Related Specification Section number. c. Submittal category. d. Name of subcontractor. 95% Construction Documents SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

76 School of Nursing Levesl 5 & 6 Office Suite Renovation e. Description of the part of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for resubmittal g. Scheduled date the Architect's final release or approval. h. Indicate critical submittal and review items, and review durations, on the CPM Schedule. 4. Schedule submittal of all shop drawings, product data, and samples to be received by the Architect for action before the "mid-point" of construction, but not later than six months after the "Date of Commencement of The Work" established by Contract. a. Costs incurred by the Architect for processing shop drawings, product data, and samples received after the mid-point of construction will be back-charged to the Contractor through the Owner. B. Distribution: Following response to initial submittal, distribute copies to the Architect, Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with submittal dates indicated. Post copies in the Project meeting room and field office. 1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in construction activities. C. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity, where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. D. No submittals will be processed by the Architect prior to the receipt of an approved Submittal Schedule. 1.9 DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS A. Prepare a daily construction report, recording the following information concerning events at the site; and submit duplicate copies to the Architect at weekly intervals: 1. List of subcontractors at the site. 2. Approximate count of personnel at the site. 3. High and low temperatures, general weather conditions. 4. Accidents and unusual events. 5. Meetings and significant decisions. 6. Stoppages, delays, shortages, losses. 7. Meter readings and similar recordings. 8. Emergency procedures. 9. Orders and requests of governing authorities. 10. Change Orders received, implemented. 11. Services connected, disconnected. 12. Equipment or system tests and start-ups. 13. Partial Completions, occupancies. 14. Substantial Completions authorized SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit newly prepared information, drawn to accurate scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not considered Shop Drawings. B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates and similar drawings. Include the following information: 1. Dimensions. 2. Identification of products and materials included. 3. Compliance with specified standards. 4. Notation of coordination requirements. 5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 6. Except for templates, patterns and similar full- size Drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2" x 11" but no larger than 36" x 48". 95% Construction Documents SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

77 School of Nursing Levesl 5 & 6 Office Suite Renovation C. Submit Shop Drawings in PDF electronic file format: 1. After review the Architect will return the annotated file to the Contractor. D. Distribution of Submittals After Architect's Review: Provide 1 copy for Job Site file and copies necessary for Contractor operations. 1. Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken in connection with construction PRODUCT DATA A. Submit Product Data in PDF electronic file format where possible. B. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product Data includes printed information such as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams and performance curves. Where Product Data must be specially prepared because standard printed data is not suitable for use, submit as "Shop Drawings." 1. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data includes information on several products, some of which are not required, mark copies to indicate the applicable information. Include the following information: a. Manufacturer's printed recommendations. b. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. c. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. d. Application of testing agency labels and seals. e. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. f. Notation of coordination requirements. 2. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents has been confirmed. 3. Where hard-copy submittal is required, submit 8 copies of each required product data. The Architect will retain three, and will return the others marked with action taken and corrections or modifications required. 4. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittal to installers, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators, and others required for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. a. Do not proceed with installation until an applicable copy of Product Data applicable is in the installer's possession. b. Do not permit use of unmarked copies of Product Data in connection with construction SAMPLES A. Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with the material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture and pattern. 1. Mount, display, or package Samples in the manner specified to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match the Architect's Sample. Include the following: a. Generic description of the Sample. b. Sample source. c. Product name or name of manufacturer. d. Compliance with recognized standards. e. Availability and delivery time. 2. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture, for a final check of these characteristics with other elements, and for a comparison of these characteristics between the final submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed. a. Where variation in color, pattern, texture or other characteristics are inherent in the material or product represented, submit multiple units (not less than 3), that show approximate limits of the variations. 95% Construction Documents SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

78 School of Nursing Levesl 5 & 6 Office Suite Renovation b. Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation and similar construction characteristics. 3. Preliminary submittals: Where Samples are for selection of color, pattern, texture or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices, submit a full set of choices for the material or product. a. Preliminary submittals will be reviewed and returned with the Architect's mark indicating selection and other action. 4. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, and except for Samples illustrating assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation and similar characteristics, submit 3 sets; two will be returned marked with the action taken. 5. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at the Project site, for quality comparisons throughout the course of construction. a. Unless noncompliance with Contract Document provisions is observed, the submittal may serve as the final submittal. b. Sample sets may be used to obtain final acceptance of the construction associated with each set. B. Distribution of Samples: Prepare and distribute additional sets to subcontractors, manufacturers, fabricators, suppliers, installers, and others as required for performance of the Work. Show distribution on transmittal forms. 1. Field Samples specified in individual Sections are special types of Samples. Field Samples are full-size examples erected on site to illustrate finishes, coatings, or finish materials and to establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. a. Comply with submittal requirements to the fullest extent possible. Process transmittal forms to provide a record of activity DELEGATED DESIGN A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally-signed PDF electronic file and three copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. The Architect s review of submittals is limited to general conformance with the design concept and general compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. Architect s review does not include quantities, dimensions, weights or gages, fabrication processes, construction means and methods, coordination with the work of other trades, or construction safety precautions, all of which are the sole responsibility of the Contractor. B. Except for submittals for record, information or similar purposes, the Architect will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return promptly. 1. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility. C. Action Stamp: The Architect will electronically stamp each submittal with a uniform, self-explanatory action stamp. The stamp will be appropriately marked, as follows, to indicate the action taken: 1. Final Unrestricted Release: Where submittals are marked "NO EXCEPTION TAKEN," that part of the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend upon that compliance. 95% Construction Documents SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

79 School of Nursing Levesl 5 & 6 Office Suite Renovation 2. Final-But-Restricted Release: When submittals are marked "EXCEPTIONS NOTED," that part of the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend on that compliance. 3. Returned for Resubmittal: When submittal is marked "SUBMIT SPECIFIED ITEM," do not proceed with that part of the Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal in accordance with the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain a different action mark. a. Do not permit submittals marked "SUBMIT SPECIFIED ITEM" to be used at the Project site, or elsewhere where Work is in progress. 4. Returned for Resubmittal: When submittal is marked "REVISE AND RESUBMIT," do not proceed with that part of the Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal in accordance with the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain a different action mark. a. Do not permit submittals marked "REVISE AND RESUBMIT" to be used at the Project site, or elsewhere where Work is in progress. 5. Returned without action: When submittal is marked "ACTION NOT REQUIRED," that part of the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend upon that compliance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION % Construction Documents SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

80 SECTION QUALITY ASSURANCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and ensure that proposed construction complies with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that completed construction complies with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. B. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 1.5 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. The Contractor shall provide inspections, tests and similar quality control services, specified in individual Specification Sections and required by governing authorities, except where they are specifically indicated to be the Owner's responsibility, or are provided by another identified entity; these services include those specified to be performed by an independent agency and not by the Contractor. Costs for these services shall be included in the Contract Sum. 95% Construction Documents QUALITY ASSURANCE

81 1. The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of required inspections, tests or similar services prove unsatisfactory and do not indicate compliance with Contract Document requirements, regardless of whether the original test was the Contractor's responsibility. a. Cost of retesting construction revised or replaced by the Contractor is the Contractor's responsibility, where required tests were performed on original construction. B. Provide services of an independent testing laboratory or facility to perform required design testing and certification testing services. 1. Submit written description of testing laboratory giving qualifications of personnel, laboratory facilities and equipment, and other information as may be requested by Architect. 2. Contractor's testing laboratory shall not be the same as Owner's testing laboratory used for quality control testing unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. 3. Employment of a testing laboratory by Contractor in no way relieves Contractor's obligation to perform work in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Required design testing and certification testing by Contractor's laboratory includes operations specified in the applicable technical specifications sections for areas of work. D. Associated Services: The Contractor shall cooperate with agencies performing required inspections, tests and similar services and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify the agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services required include but are not limited to: 1. Providing access to the Work and furnishing incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests. 2. Taking adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing or assisting the agency in taking samples. 3. Providing facilities for storage and curing of test samples, and delivery of samples to testing laboratories. 4. Providing the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use for materials mixes that require control by the testing agency. 5. Security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project site. E. Coordination: The Contractor and each agency engaged to perform inspections, tests and similar services shall coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services with a minimum of delay. In addition the Contractor and each agency shall coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests. 1. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples and similar activities. 1.6 OWNER'S TESTING LABORATORY A. The Owner will provide inspections, tests and similar quality control services specified to be performed by independent agencies and not by the Contractor, except where they are specifically indicated as the Contractor's responsibility or are provided by another identified entity. Costs for these services are not included in the Contract Sum. 1. The Owner will employ and pay for the services of an independent agency, testing laboratory or other qualified firm to perform services which are the Owner's responsibility. 1.7 QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES A. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents. 95% Construction Documents QUALITY ASSURANCE

82 B. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. C. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. 1.8 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching. B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION % Construction Documents QUALITY ASSURANCE

83 SECTION TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Existing Utilities, Services, and Facilities: Water, permanent fire protection, electrical lighting, power, heat, air conditioning and toilets that exist within the various areas of the Work, as indicated on the Drawings, will be made available to Contractor at no additional expense. By accepting use of these services and facilities, Contractor agrees to keep them clean and in good working condition at all times and upon completion of the Work, turn over all services and facilities, indicated to remain, in as good or better condition than existed at start of the Work. Include in the Base Bid all additional temporary services and facilities necessary to complete the Project Work. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention program. B. Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage. 1. Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage. 2. Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work. 3. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials. C. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include the following: 1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work. 2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. 3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge. 4. Waste handling procedures. 5. Other dust-control measures. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Take necessary fire prevention measures. Do not overload facilities, or permit them to interfere with progress. Do not allow hazardous dangerous or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on the site. 1.5 MATERIALS A. Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition may be used if approved by Architect. Provide materials suitable for use intended. 1.6 EQUIPMENT A. Provide equipment suitable for use intended. 95% Construction Documents TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

84 B. Fire Extinguishers: Hand carried, portable, UL rated. Provide class and extinguishing agent as indicated or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures. 1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by location and class of fire exposure. C. Drinking-Water Fixtures: Containerized, tap-dispenser, or bottled-water drinking-water units, including paper cup supply. 1. Where power is accessible, provide electric water coolers to maintain dispensed water temperature at 45 to 55 deg F (7.2 to 12.7 deg C). D. Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to 120-V plugs into higher-voltage outlets; equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light. 1.7 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 1.8 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. B. Electric Distribution: Provide receptacle outlets adequate for connection of power tools and equipment. 1. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electrical power cords if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not exceed safe length-voltage ratio. 2. Provide warning signs at power outlets other than 110 to 120 V. 3. Provide 4-gang outlets, spaced so 100-foot (30-m) extension cord can reach each area for power hand tools and task lighting. Provide a separate 125-V ac, 20-A circuit for each outlet. C. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions as required by codes and authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 1.9 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepare Project identification and other signs in sizes indicated. Install signs where indicated to inform public and persons seeking entrance to Project. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs. 1. Prepare temporary signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and visitors. B. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Containerize and clearly label hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Comply with Division 01 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements. 1. If required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide separate containers, clearly labeled, for each type of waste material to be deposited. C. Existing Elevator Usage: Use of Owner's existing elevators will be permitted, as long as elevators are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore elevators to condition existing before initial use, including replacing worn cables, guide shoes, and similar items of limited life. 1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, 95% Construction Documents TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

85 engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required. D. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, as long as stairs are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use. 1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If, despite such protection, stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. Avoid using tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noisemaking tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near Project site. B. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. C. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erecting structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform personnel and public of possible hazard. D. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire-protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA Provide fire extinguishers, installed on walls on mounting brackets, visible and accessible from space being served, with sign mounted above. a. Provide Class ABC dry-chemical extinguishers or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures. b. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose; provide not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell. 2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations. 3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire-protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting. 4. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition. 5. Permanent Fire Protection: At earliest feasible date in each area of Project, complete installation of permanent fire-protection facility, including connected services, and place into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities. 6. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and first-aid fire-protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES A. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise. 1. Construct dustproof partitions of not less than nominal 3-5/8-inch studs, 5/8-inch gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and 1/2-inch fire-retardant plywood on construction side. 2. Seal joints and perimeter. 3. Protect air-handling equipment. 4. Weatherstrip openings. 5. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partitions. 95% Construction Documents TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

86 1.12 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage caused by freezing temperatures and similar elements. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. C. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor. 2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 - (Not Used) PART 3 - (Not Used) END OF SECTION % Construction Documents TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

87 SECTION COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS UT Health Science Center Houston PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents, such as "specialties," "systems," "structure," "finishes," "accessories," and similar terms. Such terms are self-explanatory and have well recognized meanings in the construction industry. 1. "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased for the Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. a. "Named Products" are items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model designation, indicated in the manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of the date of the Contract Documents. 2. "Materials" are products that are substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the Work. 3. "Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that requires service connections such as wiring or piping. B. Unless foreign produced products, materials, and equipment are specifically required by the Contract Documents, provide only products, materials, and equipment of domestic manufacture. 1. Domestic products, materials, and equipment are those mined or produced in the U.S., or are items substantially manufactured (50% or more of their cost) in the U.S. 2. Foreign Products", as distinguished from "domestic products," are items substantially manufactured (50 percent or more of value) outside of the United States and its possessions; or produced or supplied by entities substantially owned (more than 50 percent) by persons who are not citizens of nor living within the United States and its possessions 3. Conditions under which foreign products might be accepted, even though domestic products are specified, include the following: a. No available domestic product complies with the Contract Documents. C. The terms "products", "material(s)", and "equipment" shall mean any component object (capable of being seen, touched, or otherwise sensed), as defined in any subject matter under discussion which is to be incorporated in the Work to complement and effect complete construction as shown on the Drawings and specified or described in the Project Manual, completely furnished and installed, complete and ready for intended use. D. The Contract is based on the products, materials, and equipment described in the Contract Documents. 1. If the Drawings disagree within themselves or with the Project Manual, the better quality or greater quantity of work or materials shall be included in the Contract Sum, and unless specified in writing, shall be provided. E. Verify prior to bidding that all specified items will be available in time for installation during orderly and timely progress of the Work. 1. In the event specified items or items will not be so available, so notify the Architect at least 10 days prior to receipt of Bids. 2. Additional costs due to delays because of nonavailability of specified items, when such delays could have been avoided, will be backcharged to the Contractor and will not be borne by the Owner. F. Where the questions of appearance, artistic effect, or harmony of design are concerned, the Architect reserves the right to refuse acceptance of any product proposed to be substituted for that specified, if in his opinion the item to be substituted is not harmonious to the finished effect and appearance desired, as portrayed in the Drawings and Specifications. The Architect's said refusal to accept, established by this Article, is final. 95% Construction Documents COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

88 G. Intellectual Property: The phrases Equal to, equivalent to or any similar terms in the Contract Documents permitting the Contractor to exercise its discretion in selecting certain goods or services for the Project shall not apply to any products, materials, equipment, apparatuses, methods, processes or designs when use on the Project infringes, or may infringe, one or more intangible property rights including, without limitation, a patent, copyright or trademark ( Infringing Goods or Services ). No Infringing Goods or Services shall be used on or in connection with the Project. 1. The Contractor shall obtain from the applicable Subcontractor, supplier, manufacturer or vendor a written certification that: a. Is addressed to the Owner, Architect and Contractor. b. Identifies the goods or services to be supplied or provided with particularity. c. States that such goods or services: do not infringe any intangible property rights including, without limitation, a patent, copyright or trademark. d. With respect to the particular good or services, states that: [t]his certification of noninfringement is made to the Project Owner, Architect for their reliance as inducement to obtain their approval for use of [identification of the goods or services] on the Project. 2. The Contractor shall obtain such certifications before proposing use of the goods or services in a Project Submittal, when a Submittal is required, or otherwise, before use of the goods or services on the Project. Any express or implied approval of such goods or services for the Project before receiving such certification shall not relieve the Contractor of its obligation to produce the certification. 3. Indemnity: The Contractor and the applicable Subcontractor, supplier, manufacturer or vendor supplying or providing any goods or services selected by the Contractor for use on the Project ( Indemnitors ) agree to and shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless the Owner, the Architect, and their officers, directors, partners, members, employees, representatives and consultants ( Indemnitees ) from and against all claims, damages, losses, causes of action, injunctions, suits, judgments and expenses, including without limitation reasonably necessary attorneys fees, experts fees and other costs of defense or litigation ( Claims ), arising out of or in connection with, or alleged to arise out of or in connection with, the infringement of any patent, copyright, trademark or other intangible property right caused, in whole or in part, by use of such goods or services on the Project. The Indemnitors intend that these obligations shall apply regardless of whether any such claims are alleged to be caused in part by any Indemnitee or any Indemnitee s alleged contributory infringement, excluding only such claims arising from a proprietary specification in Contract Documents. a. These obligations shall survive termination or completion of this Agreement; b. At the respective sole options of the Owner and Architect, the Contractor herein shall satisfy the defense obligation by: (a) reimbursing the Owner and Architect, respectively, for the cost of defense and legal counsel they select; or (b) accepting tender of, and providing, such defense. c. In the event any portion of this indemnity obligation is found unenforceable for any reason, such portion shall be deemed stricken, it being the intent of the Indemnitors to provide the broadest indemnification of the Indemnitees allowed by law consistent with this provision. 4. The Contractor shall assure that each subcontract, purchase order or other form of contract for goods or services it provides for the Project shall incorporate this provision for the benefit of the Owner and Architect. 1.2 PRODUCT SELECTION A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged, and unless otherwise indicated, that are unused at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 95% Construction Documents COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

89 5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's. 6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products. 7. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in Substitutions article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. B. Product Selection Procedures: Procedures for product selection include the following: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the product named. a. Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name single manufacturers or sources, provide a product by the manufacturer or from the source named that complies with requirements. a. Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. a. Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. a. Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that size, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide either the specific product or system indicated or a comparable product or system by another manufacturer. Comply with provisions in Substitutions article. 6. Standard of Manufacture / Basis-of-Design Products: Where Specifications are included and also refer to a list of manufacturers' names, provide either the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Substitutions article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. a. Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. 7. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily. a. If no product available within specified category matches satisfactorily and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the Contract Documents on "substitutions" for selection of a matching product. 8. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with other specified requirements. a. Standard Range: Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 1.3 FIRE-RESISTIVE DESIGNS A. Basis Of Design: Coordinate with fire-resistive designs included on the Drawings and provide products that comply with each of those specific designs. 1. It is the intent that materials listed in reproductions and excerpts of fire tests contained in the Drawings match those products specified in each respective specification section. a. Do not provide products of manufacturers listed in reproductions unless that manufacturer is also included in the respective specification section. b. Do not provide products of manufacturers listed in the respective specification section unless the manufacturer is also included in the reproductions. 95% Construction Documents COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

90 B. Where Contractor desires to provide products of a manufacturer not listed in reproductions, submit a fully executed Substitution Request Form complete with a reproduction of a fire-resistive design produced by the same agency, and equivalent in fire-resistive properties, as the basis of design. 1. Do not submit, or request acceptance of, substitute materials or products of not-listed manufacturers without providing complete written documentation proving the proposed substitute has been tested by the same testing laboratory as shown on Drawings. C. In the event of a conflict between information in Drawings and the respective specification sections, notify the Architect for clarification before proceeding 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product List Schedule: Within 15 days from the "Notice To Proceed" or "Date of Commencement of the Work" (whichever occurs first), submit a schedule, showing all products specified. 1. For the "Product List Schedule", use the schedule form included in Division 00, or photo-copies of all pertinent pages from the Project Manual with manufacturers listed. Encircle or underline the manufacturers proposed for each item in each individual specification section. Include the actual product/model name and number appropriate to each item. 2. Arrange the pages in sequence and place in a three-ring binder for submittal to the Architect. 3. Coordinate the Product List Schedule with the Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Schedule of Submittals. 4. Architect's Action: The Architect will respond in writing to the Contractor within 2 weeks of receipt of the completed product list schedule. No response within this time period constitutes no objection to listed manufacturers or products, but does not constitute a waiver of the requirement that products comply with Contract Documents. The Architect's response will include a return copy of the submitted list indicating unacceptable product selections and including a brief explanation of reasons for this action. B. Extra Materials (Attic Stock) Schedule: In conjunction with the Product List Schedule, submit a schedule, showing all products for which extra materials are required. 1. Include in the Extra Materials Schedule, a listing of each affected specification section, the specific material(s), the specified amounts (percentages or actual) of extra materials, and actual quantities of each material to be submitted based upon total area or volume to be installed in the Work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. It is the intention to exclude from the Work of the Project, all products, materials, and equipment that contain hazardous materials in any shape or form. For purposes of this intent, the term "Hazardous Substance" are defined as containing any element, constituent, chemical, substance, compound, or mixture, which are defined as a hazardous substance by any local, state or federal law, rule, ordinance, by-law, or regulation pertaining to environmental regulation, contamination, clean-up or disclosure, including, without limitation, The Occupational Safety and Health Act ("OSHA"), and including all state and local counterparts of such laws (all such laws, rules and regulations being referred to collectively as "Environmental Laws"). 1. If Contractor becomes aware of a product scheduled for use on this project that contains any hazardous material, notify the Architect and request confirmation of acceptability prior to commencing installation. B. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind, from a single source. C. Compatibility of Options: When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between two or more products for use on the Project, the product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. D. Nameplates: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint manufacturer's or producer's nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products which will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior. 1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface or, where required for observation after installation, on an accessible surface that is not conspicuous. 95% Construction Documents COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

91 2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service-connected or power-operated equipment. Locate on an easily accessible surface which is inconspicuous in occupied spaces. The nameplate shall contain the following information and other essential operating data: a. Name of product and manufacturer. b. Model and serial number. c. Capacity. d. Speed. e. Ratings. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration and loss, including theft. Control delivery schedules to minimize long-term storage at the Site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. In particular coordinate delivery and installation to ensure minimum holding or storage times for items known or recognized to be flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft and other sources of loss. 1. Deliver products to the Site in the manufacturer's sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 2. Store products at the Site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 3. Store heavy materials away from the Project structure in a manner that will not endanger the supporting construction. 4. Containers which are broken, opened, watermarked, or otherwise damaged, and which contain caked, lumpy or otherwise damaged materials are unacceptable and shall be immediately removed from the premises. 5. Store all cement, lime, plaster, aggregates, roofing materials, and similar items above ground and protected from dampness, weather and other damage. 6. Retain all loose and small detachable parts of apparatus and equipment until the completion of the Work. Turn over to the Owner or his representative designated to receive them, and obtain from him an itemized receipt thereof in triplicate. Retain one copy of this receipt for final payment for the Work. B. Ensure that products are delivered to the Project in accordance with the Progress Schedule. In determining date of delivery, allow sufficient time for submittal approvals, including the possibility of having to resubmit improperly prepared submittals or products other than those specified, and the necessary fabrication or procurement time along with the delivery method and distance involved. 1.6 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS A. Require the Installer of each major component to inspect both the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner. B. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securing Work. Secure Work true to line and level. Allow for expansion and building movement. C. Recheck measurements and dimensions, before starting each installation. D. Install each component during weather conditions and Project status that will ensure the best possible results. Isolate each part of the completed construction from incompatible material as necessary to prevent deterioration. E. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests, to minimize the necessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose. F. Where mounting heights are not indicated, install individual components at standard mounting heights recognized within the industry for the particular application indicated. Where conformance with industry standards creates a conflict or questionable installation, consult with the Architect for final decision. 95% Construction Documents COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

92 1.7 INSTALLATION A. Apply, install, connect, erect, use, clean, and condition all manufactured products in accordance with the manufacturer's printed directions, unless herein specified to the contrary. Where manufacturer's printed directions are available and where reference is made to manufacturer's directions in the Specifications, submit copies of such directions to the Architect in accordance with the requirements of Section prior to the beginning of any work covered thereby. 1. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. B. Where specific installation instructions are not part of these Specifications and Drawings, install all products, materials, and equipment in strict accordance with instructions from the respective manufacturers. C. Where construction procedures or installation instructions are included in the Contract Documents, or incorporated by reference to industry standards and codes, review the instructions to ensure the completed work will conform to the requirements of the Contract. 1. Make written request for clarification from the Architect if: a. The procedure deviates from good construction practice. b. Following the procedure will adversely affect any required warranties and guarantees. c. Contractor objects to procedures for any other reason. 2. Include in request for clarification Contractor's suggested procedures for accomplishing the work. D. In accepting or assenting to the use of any apparatus or material, or name brand or arrangement thereof, the Architect in no way waives any of the requirements of these Specifications or the warranty embodied therein. E. Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Unless otherwise indicated, maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet (2.4 m) in spaces without a suspended ceiling. F. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. G. Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Refer questionable choices to the Architect for final decision. H. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 1.8 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction forces. B. Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction forces. 1. Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 2. Include Owner's construction forces at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction forces if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction. 95% Construction Documents COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

93 1.9 ACCEPTANCE OF EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEMS A. The Owner will not accept the start of the warranty period on systems or equipment until Substantial Completion is issued for Owner's occupancy of the building, in part or whole. Contractor shall make such provisions as required to extend the manufacturer's warranty from time of initial operation of systems or equipment until Substantial Completion is established in writing STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect fieldassembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Assurance." 1.11 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. 1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION % Construction Documents COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

94 SECTION EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. General installation of products. 4. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 5. Progress cleaning. 6. Starting and adjusting. 7. Protection of installed construction. 8. Correction of the Work. B. No requirement set forth herein, in any other Section of the Project Manual, or on the Drawings, is intended to dictate construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or safety precautions, which are solely the responsibility of the Contractor. 1. If the Contractor determines that requirements in the Drawings or Project Manual are in conflict with the above, request further instructions from the Architect before proceeding. 1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal. 1.3 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to the Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. 1.4 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services. B. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: a. Description of the Work. b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. c. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections. 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 95% Construction Documents EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

95 5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 1.5 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility company and Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Architect and Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's and Owner's written permission. C. Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. D. Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. E. Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for interpretation to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 1.6 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. B. Locate and lay out control lines for column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. C. Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Included types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. 1.7 INSTALLATION A. Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied and unoccupied spaces. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations. F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. 95% Construction Documents EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

96 H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. J. Hazardous Materials: Do not use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are considered hazardous. 1.8 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored. B. Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. 1. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. H. Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. I. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. J. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. 95% Construction Documents EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

97 K. Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 1.9 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section "Quality Assurance" PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION % Construction Documents EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

98 SECTION CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of existing construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 7 days prior to the time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information: 1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided. 2. Changes to Existing Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utilities: List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List utilities that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long service will be disrupted. 6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure. 7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform remodeling, alteration, minor demolition, cutting, patching, removal, refinishing, relocation, and disposal work in accordance with Federal, State, and local health and safety standards, codes and ordinances. Where conflicts occur, comply with the more restrictive requirements. B. Perform remodeling, alteration, minor demolition, cutting, patching, removal, refinishing, and relocation work in such a manner as to preserve the aesthetic and structural integrity of materials and construction. C. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. D. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include, but are not limited to: 1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Air or smoke barriers. 3. Fire-protection systems. 4. Control systems. 5. Communication systems. 6. Conveying systems. 7. Electrical wiring systems. 8. Operating systems of special construction in Division 13 Sections. 95% Construction Documents CUTTING AND PATCHING

99 E. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. F. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, demolished materials become Contractor's property; remove from Project site. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Visit the Project Site to determine by inspection all existing conditions, including access to the Site, the nature of structures, objects, and materials to be encountered, and all other facts concerning or affecting the Work. Information on the Drawings showing existing conditions does not constitute a guarantee that other items may not be found or encountered. B. Take into consideration obvious existing conditions, installations, and obstructions affecting Work of this section as necessary Work of this section, the same as though completely shown or described. C. Work with noise-producing equipment is subject, at all times, to Owner's approval of entire procedure. Submit a schedule of all such operations to the Owner at least two weeks in advance of need and secure approval of the Owner before proceeding. 1.6 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to remodeling procedures area. Conduct remodeling procedures so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. B. Maintain access to existing corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. C. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. 1.7 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS A. It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials. 95% Construction Documents CUTTING AND PATCHING

100 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of remodeling procedures required. D. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. E. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. F. Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during remodeling procedures operations. G. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from remodeling procedures activities. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES A. Existing Utilities: Maintain services indicated to remain and protect them against damage during remodeling procedures operations. B. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide at least 72 hours' notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during changeover. C. Utility Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor. 2. If utility services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with remodeling procedures provide temporary utilities that bypass area of remodeling procedures and that maintain continuity of service to other parts of building. 3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Protect work to remain from damage. Use barricades, tarpaulins, temporary walls, plywood, planking, masking, and other suitable means and methods as accepted. 1. Restore accidental or careless damage to work to remain in place to a condition as good as or better than existed before work was commenced and at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Provide all shoring and bracing necessary to positively protect existing elements of the building. Use material adequate to support anticipated loads with a properly calculated margin of safety. Provide for transfer of stresses to successively lower construction. 95% Construction Documents CUTTING AND PATCHING

101 C. Carefully remove and replace items of existing construction indicated to remain upon completion of the Contract, but which require removal to complete the work. Match condition of construction prior to the start of the Work unless otherwise required. Carefully remove items indicated for relocations in new Work, or to be retained by Owner, to avoid damage, thoroughly clean, and reinstall as indicated or store as directed. 1. Items of salvable value to the Contractor may be removed from the structure as the work progresses. Salvaged items must be transported from the Project Site as they are removed. Storage or sale of removed items on the Project Site will not be permitted. D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct remodeling procedures and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. 3.4 POLLUTION CONTROLS A. Seal off areas in which work is in progress from the occupied portions of the building to prevent entry of dust and noise into occupied portions of the building. Take all necessary measures to limit the amount of dust and dirt rising and scattering in the air to the lowest practical level. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations. B. Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 1. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. C. Cleaning: Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by remodeling procedures operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before remodeling procedures operations began. 3.5 PERFORMANCE A. Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Structural Elements: If not specifically shown, but removal or alteration is required, perform such removal or alteration only upon written approval of the Architect/Structural Engineer. Do not damage or alter any structural element of the existing building. Where drilling or fastening to post-tensioned reinforced concrete construction is required, X-ray existing structure to determine tendon locations and potential for tendon tension release before proceeding. Notify Architect/Structural Engineer in each instance when conflict occurs. Architect/Structural Engineer will determine corrective action required. Do not proceed until corrective action has been received. 3. Proceed with remodeling procedures systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete remodeling procedures operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 95% Construction Documents CUTTING AND PATCHING

102 4. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 5. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 6. Do not use cutting torches. 7. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 8. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 9. Locate remodeling procedures equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 10. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. 11. Return elements of construction and surfaces that are to remain to condition existing before remodeling procedures operations began. C. Existing Facilities: Comply with Owner s requirements for using and protecting elevators, stairs, walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during remodeling procedures operations. D. Removed and Reinstalled Items: Comply with the following: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to match new equipment. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during remodeling procedures. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during remodeling procedures and reinstalled in their original locations after remodeling procedures operations are complete. F. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI-WP and its Addendum. 1. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the methods recommended by RFCI. G. Air-Conditioning Equipment: Remove equipment without releasing refrigerants. H. Cutting for Access to Mechanical and Electrical Systems: Remove existing ceilings, remove, cut, and patch or replace existing walls, partitions, and floors as may be necessary for access to valves, piping, conduit, and tubing by mechanical and electrical trades. 1. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 2. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. 3.6 PATCHING AND REPAIRS A. Patching, Repairing, and Finishing of Existing Work: 1. Perform in compliance with the applicable requirements of the Specification technical Section covering the work to be performed and the requirements of this Section. a. Repair all holes and damaged areas exposed to view in ceilings, walls, and floors of all finished spaces. Match existing adjacent construction and finish, unless otherwise indicated or specified. 95% Construction Documents CUTTING AND PATCHING

103 b. Minor surface abrasions, small nail holes, cracks, aged checked natural wood finish and other similar deterioration not visible, when viewed under finished lighting conditions, from a distance of 6 feet will not be required to be repaired if the base material is sound and suitable to receive the scheduled finishes, if any. c. Grout and seal interior penetration holes in walls, ceilings, and floors of unfinished spaces and spaces not exposed to view with accepted materials as required for sound sealing and firestopping where required. d. Grout and seal penetration holes through exterior walls above and below grade as required to produce a weathertight seal. B. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. C. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. D. Damages: Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by demolition and removal operations at no additional cost to the Owner. E. Painting and Finishing: 1. Preparation: Prepare patched areas as required for new work. Wash areas to be repainted with neutral soap or detergent, thoroughly rinse, and sand when dry. Feather remaining paint edges smooth with sandpaper. 2. Painting and Finishing: Conform to the applicable provisions of Painting Section. Prepare and build up bare areas and patches in existing painted surfaces with proper primer and intermediate coats, sand smooth and flush with adjoining surfaces. Paint all areas scheduled to be painted and/or repainted as specified in Painting Section of the Specifications, except the first or primer coat may be omitted on existing painted surfaces. 3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. B. Disposal of Debris: Clean up all material, debris, and rubbish resulting from remodeling work, remove from the building and Site, and legally dispose of. Leave all areas of work in "broom clean" condition. 1. No burning of demolished materials will be permitted. C. Leave all areas of work in "broom clean" condition. END OF SECTION % Construction Documents CUTTING AND PATCHING

104 SECTION CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: Inspection procedures. 3. Project Record Documents. 4. Operation and maintenance manuals. 5. Warranties. 6. Instruction of Owner's personnel. 1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 13. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. If additional inspections are required due to Contractor s failure to properly complete items from previous lists, the Owner will incur additional costs. Contractor agrees to reimburse the Owner through deductive Change Order to the Contract for all costs associated with reinspections. C. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. 95% Construction Documents CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

105 1.3 FINAL COMPLETION A. Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and completed operations where required. 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 6. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. If additional inspections are required due to Contractor s failure to properly complete items from previous lists, the Owner will incur additional costs. Contractor agrees to reimburse the Owner through deductive Change Order to the Contract for all costs associated with reinspections. 1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 1.5 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. B. Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue- or black-line white prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings. 1. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. 95% Construction Documents CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

106 d. Mark Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on Contract Drawings. 2. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location. 3. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. 4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate numbers, and similar identification where applicable. 5. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. C. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. Mark copy to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, where applicable. D. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. Mark one set to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, where applicable. E. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. 1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows: 1. Operation Data: a. Emergency instructions and procedures. b. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating standards. c. Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and weekend operations. d. Description of controls and sequence of operations. e. Piping diagrams. 2. Maintenance Data: a. Manufacturer's information, including list of spare parts. b. Name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier. c. Maintenance procedures. d. Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance. e. Maintenance record forms. f. Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials. g. Copies of maintenance service agreements. h. Copies of warranties and bonds. B. Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and index data in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets. Identify each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents. 95% Construction Documents CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

107 1.7 WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (115-by-280-mm) paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. 1.8 FINAL CLEANING A. Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. C. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. b. Clean exposed hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. c. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including plenums, shafts, attics, and similar spaces. d. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. e. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. f. Remove labels that are not permanent. g. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. h. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. i. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. j. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. 95% Construction Documents CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

108 k. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. l. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. E. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION % Construction Documents CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

109 SECTION SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and store. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. E. Dismantle: To remove by disassembling or detaching an item from a surface, using gentle methods and equipment to prevent damage to the item and surfaces; disposing of items unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. 1.2 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, demolished materials become Contractor's property; remove from Project site. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Maintain all submittals at the Project Site for use during construction and for distribution to the Owner, through the Architect, upon completion of the Work. B. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. C. Engineering Survey: Submit engineering survey of condition of building. D. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection and dust and noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. E. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's [building manager's] [and] [other tenants'] on-site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of elevator and stairs. 5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work. F. Inventory: After selective demolition is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. G. Predemolition Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective demolition operations. Submit before Work begins. H. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered. 95% Construction Documents SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

110 I. Warranties: Documentation indicating that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project. B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: Comply with Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." C. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program. D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. E. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to remodeling procedures area. Conduct remodeling procedures so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. B. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. C. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. D. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials and using approved contractors so as not to void existing warranties. Notify warrantor before proceeding. B. Notify warrantor on completion of selective demolition, and obtain documentation verifying that existing system has been inspected and warranty remains in effect. Submit documentation at Project closeout. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS A. PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA % Construction Documents SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

111 2.2 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials. B. Comply with material and installation requirements specified in individual Specification Sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Review Project Record Documents of existing construction or other existing condition and hazardous material information provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in Project Record Documents. C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. D. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. E. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. F. Engage a professional engineer to perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations. 1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. G. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings preconstruction photographs as required. 1. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies. 3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material and leave in place. c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. 95% Construction Documents SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

112 d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material and leave in place. C. Utility Requirements: Refer to Facilities Services Subgroup Divisions for shutting off, disconnecting, removing, and sealing or capping utilities. Do not start selective demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Dangerous Materials: Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives, acids, flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with selective demolition operations. B. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. D. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 3. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 4. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." E. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. 2. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist. F. Cleaning: Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 95% Construction Documents SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

113 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 5. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 6. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 7. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly B. Existing Facilities: Comply with building manager's requirements for using and protecting elevators, stairs, walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during selective demolition operations. C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. D. Removed and Salvaged Items: Comply with the following: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. E. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. F. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.5 PATCHING AND REPAIRS A. Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demolition operations. B. Patching: Comply with Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching." 3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA-approved construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION % Construction Documents SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

114 SECTION JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the requirements of Division 01 section Common Product Requirements, submit a complete listing of all manufacturers, products, model numbers, and designs proposed for use in the Work of this Section. B. Maintain all submittals at the Project Site for use during construction and for distribution to the Owner, through the Architect, upon completion of the Work. C. Submit only the items listed below to the Architect for review in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 sections. D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint sealants in 1/2- inch- (13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (150-mm-) long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that products furnished comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. F. SWRI Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program. G. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. H. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating sealants comply with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations. I. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has specialized in installing joint sealants similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in jointsealant installations with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Product Testing: Obtain test results for "Product Test Reports" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month period. 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods. 3. Test elastomeric joint sealants according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement, adhesion-in peel, and indentation hardness. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. 95% Construction Documents JOINT SEALANTS

115 B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1. Label Do Not Use and remove from Project site materials subjected to moisture, contaminates or temperature extremes outside manufacturer s recommended limits. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer. 2. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). 3. When joint substrates are wet. B. Joint-Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths vary from the range allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Joint-Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates. 1.5 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Installer agreeing to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special Elastomeric Sealant Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by elastomeric sealant manufacturer agreeing to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion for silicone sealants. D. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: Provide custom color(s) for exposed elastomeric sealants, to match Architect s samples 95% Construction Documents JOINT SEALANTS

116 2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses. B. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule, provide products with the capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at the time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses indicated. 2.3 SILICONE ELASTOMERIC JOINT-SEALANTS A. Low-Modulus Neutral, Nonacid,-Curing Silicone Sealant: 1. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 2. Class: Additional Movement Capability: 50 percent movement in extension and 50 percent movement in compression 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 6. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Nonstaining to porous substrates per ASTM C Applications: All exterior locations not otherwise indicated, and sealant joints on interior side of components subject to thermal movement from external heat sources. 8. Products: a. 795; Dow Corning. b. Silpruf; GE Silicones. c. 895; Pecora Corporation. d. PSI-641; Polymeric Systems, Inc. e. Omniseal; Sonneborn Building Products Div., BASF Building Systems. 2.4 LATEX JOINT-SEALANT A. Latex Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C Products: a. Chem-Calk 600; Bostik Inc. b. AC-20; Pecora Corporation. c. PSI-701; Polymeric Systems, Inc. 2. Applications: All non-fire-rated interior locations, exposed and concealed, including all non-firerated wall penetrations concealed above finished ceilings, except where elastomeric sealants are indicated or required. 2.5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT-SEALANT A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following: 1. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E Products: a. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corporation. b. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; USG Corp., United States Gypsum Co. B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission. 1. Product: BA-98; Pecora Corporation. 95% Construction Documents JOINT SEALANTS

117 2.6 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, of type recommended by sealant manufacturer and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. a. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. 2. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 3. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 95% Construction Documents JOINT SEALANTS

118 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and back of joints. F. Install sealants by proven techniques to comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work. END OF SECTION % Construction Documents JOINT SEALANTS

119 SECTION ALUMINUM FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the requirements of Division 01 section Common Product Requirements, submit a complete listing of all manufacturers, products, model numbers, and designs proposed for use in the Work of this Section. B. Maintain all submittals at the Project Site for use during construction and for distribution to the Owner, through the Architect, upon completion of the Work. C. Submit only the items listed below to the Architect for review in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 sections. D. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of components including hardware, glazing, and glazing stops. Show attachments to other Work. E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of manufacturer's standard sizes and of same thickness and material indicated for the Work. If finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed interior aluminum framing systems similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing interior aluminum framing systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. C. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum frames through one source from a single manufacturer with the capacity and resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties. D. Product Options: Drawings indicate dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction size. Other manufacturers' products complying with requirements may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Sections. 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. E. Fire-Rated Door Frames: Frames complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver frames palleted, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. B. Inspect frames on delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and are approved by Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. C. Store frames at building site under cover and as near as possible to final installation location. Do not use covering material that will cause discoloration of aluminum finish. 95% Construction Documents ALUMINUM FRAMES

120 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install interior aluminum frames until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof; wet work in spaces is complete and dry; flooring, walls, ceilings, and work above ceilings is complete; and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. B. Field Measurements: Verify interior aluminum frame dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Raco Interior Products, Inc. 2. Versatrac; a division of A. J. May, Inc. 3. Architectural Components, Incorporated. 4. Dual Lock Partition Systems 5. Framework Manufacturing Co., Inc. 6. Modulex, Inc. 7. Western Integrated Materials, Inc. 8. Wilson Partitions, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) alloy 6063-T5 or alloy and temper required to suit structural and finish requirements. B. Structural Silicone Sealant: Type recommended by sealant and system manufacturers that complies with ASTM C 1184 requirements, is compatible with system components with which it comes in contact, and is specifically formulated and tested for use as a structural sealant. 1. Color: Clear 2. Tensile Strength: 100 psi (689.5 kpa) minimum. 3. Provide sealant with modulus of elasticity that will not allow movement of more than 25 percent of joint width, unless less movement is required by structural-sealant-glazed systems' design. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Provide interior aluminum frame components that comply with dimensions, profiles, and relationships to adjoining work of components indicated on Drawings. B. Door Frames: Extruded aluminum, not less than inch (1.6 mm) thick, reinforced for hinges and strikes. C. Doors: Manufacturer's standard 1-3/4-inch- (44.5-mm-) thick glazed doors with minimum inch- (3.2-mm-) thick, extruded tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie-rods. 1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Provide manufacturer's standard snap-on extruded-aluminum glazing stops and preformed EPDM gaskets. D. Glass Frames: Extruded aluminum, not less than inch (1.6 mm) thick, designed for glass thickness indicated. E. Ceiling Tracks: Extruded aluminum, not less than inch (1.6 mm) thick. F. Trim: Extruded aluminum, not less than inch (1.6 mm) thick, removable snap-in glass stops and door stops without exposed fasteners. 2.4 ACCESSORIES 95% Construction Documents ALUMINUM FRAMES

121 A. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel or other noncorrosive metal fasteners compatible with frames, stops, panels, reinforcement plates, hardware, anchors, and other items being fastened. B. Door Silencers (Mutes): Manufacturer's standard mohair or vinyl. C. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard extruded or molded plastic D. Glazing: As specified in Division % Construction Documents ALUMINUM FRAMES

122 E. Hardware: As specified in Division Finish exposed parts to match door finish, unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Machine jambs and prepare for hardware, with concealed reinforcement plates, drilled and tapped as required, and fastened within frame with concealed screws. B. Provide concealed corner reinforcements and alignment clips for precise butt or mitered connections. C. Glazing Channels: Provide minimum clearances for thickness and type of glass indicated according to FGMA's "Glazing Manual." 1. Fabricate frames for glass to allow glass replacement without dismantling frame. D. Fabricate all components to allow secure installation without exposed fasteners. E. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with polyamide epoxy coating. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. C. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. D. High-Performance Organic Finish (2-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-C12C40R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals and pretreated with chromate phosphate; Chemical Finish: conversion coating; Organic Coating: manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with AAMA 2605 and with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: Match Architect's sample. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of entrance and storefront systems. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Verify that wall thickness does not exceed standard tolerances allowed by throat size indicated. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with frame manufacturer's written installation instructions and approved Shop Drawings. Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure non-movement joints. B. Install frames plumb and square, securely anchored to substrates with fasteners recommended by frame manufacturer. 95% Construction Documents ALUMINUM FRAMES

123 C. Install entrances plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp or rack. Lubricate operating hardware and other moving parts according to hardware manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Install surface-mounted hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. D. Install partition components in the longest possible lengths; components up to 48 inches (1200 mm) long must be one piece. Fasten to suspended ceiling grid on maximum 48-inch (1200-mm) centers, using sheet metal screws or other fasteners approved by frame manufacturer. 1. Use concealed installation clips to ensure that splices and connections are tightly butted and properly aligned. 2. Secure clips to main structural extrusion components and not to snap-in or trim members. 3. Do not leave screws or other fasteners exposed to view when installation is complete. E. Erection Tolerances: Install entrance and storefront systems to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Variation from Plane: Limit variation from plane or location shown to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.7 m); 1/4 inch (6 mm) over total length. 2. Alignment: Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). F. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3.3 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Clean exposed frames promptly after installation, using cleaning methods recommended by frame manufacturer. 1. Clean and maintain anodized aluminum according to AAMA 609. B. Touch up marred areas so touchup is not visible from a distance of 48 inches (1200 mm). Remove and replace frames with damaged finish that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide protection required to ensure that framing will be without damage or deterioration on Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION % Construction Documents ALUMINUM FRAMES

124 PRODUCT DATA SHEET 0 - SECTION DOOR HARDWARE PART 2 - GENERAL UT Health Science Center Houston 2.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for swing, sliding, and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed. 1. Provide cylinders keyed to building system and with finish to match adjacent surfaces. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that complies with requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. B. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. 2.3 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the requirements of Division 01 section Common Product Requirements, submit a complete listing of all manufacturers, products, model numbers, and designs proposed for use in the Work of this Section. B. Maintain all submittals at the Project Site for use during construction and for distribution to the Owner, through the Architect, upon completion of the Work. C. Submit only the items listed below to the Architect for review in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 sections. D. Submit final hardware schedule in the manner and format indicated below. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size thickness, hand, function, and finish of hardware. 1. Use same identifying "set numbers" given in this Section. Coordinate submittal with doors and frames submittals and use same "opening number" identification as given on Drawings and in the Door Schedule. a. Submittals not using numbering identification system shown on Architect's Drawings and Schedules will be rejected. 2. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organize schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. b. Name and manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of each hardware set cross referenced to indications on Drawings both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for hardware and showing the swing degree for each door. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. 3. Submittal Sequence: Submit final schedule at earliest possible date particularly where acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of schedule. 2.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer. 95% Construction Documents DOOR HARDWARE

125 B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities in the Project's vicinity, that has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant (AHC) who is available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation. 1. Require supplier to meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing. 2.5 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct. B. Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of installation (shop or Project site). C. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable so that completion of the Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation. 2.6 MAINTENANCE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: At completion of the work, provide a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. 2.7 WARRANTY: A. Provide guarantee from hardware supplier as follows: 1. Hinges: Life of the Building 2. Exit Devices Five Years; Except Electrical products One year 3. Locksets: Three years 4. Closers: Ten Years; except electronic closers: One year 5. All other Hardware: Two years PART 3 - PRODUCTS 3.1 SCHEDULED HARDWARE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: To establish standards of manufacture, operation, performance, and appearance, drawings and specifications are based on products of the manufacturer listed first for each device in the Hardware Recap in Part 3 of this Section. It is the preference of UTMB that those first-listed manufacturers be utilized for this work. Provided compliance with project requirements, products of the other listed manufacturers will also be acceptable. B. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish hardware are indicated in the "Hardware Recap and Schedule" at the end of this Section. Products are identified by using hardware designation numbers of the following: 1. Manufacturer's Product Designations: The product designation and name of one manufacturer are listed for each hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Provide either the product designated or, where more than one manufacturer is specified for each hardware type, the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers that complies with requirements. 2. ANSI/BHMA designations used elsewhere in this Section or in schedules to describe hardware items or to define quality or function are derived from the following standards. Provide products complying with these standards and requirements specified elsewhere in this Section. a. Butts and Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A b. Bored and Pre-assembled Locks and Latches: ANSI/BHMA A c. Exit Devices: ANSI/BHMA A d. Door Controls - Closers: ANSI/BHMA A e. Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products: ANSI/BHMA A % Construction Documents DOOR HARDWARE

126 f. Architectural Door Trim: ANSI/BHMA A g. Template Hinge Dimensions: ANSI/BHMA A h. Door Controls - Overhead Holders: ANSI/BHMA A i. Interconnected Locks and Latches: ANSI/BHMA A j. Mortise Locks and Latches: ANSI/BHMA A k. Sliding and Folding Door Hardware: ANSI/BHMA A l. Closer Holder Release Devices: ANSI/BHMA A m. Auxiliary Hardware: ANSI/BHMA A n. Self-Closing Hinges and Pivots: ANSI/BHMA A o. Materials and Finishes: ANSI/BHMA A UT Health Science Center Houston 3.2 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise acceptable to Architect. 1. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. B. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI/BHMA A156 series standards for each type of hardware item and with ANSI/BHMA A for finish designations indicated. Do not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise specified. C. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated. D. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including "prepared for paint" surfaces to receive painted finish. E. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Where thru-bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners. 3.3 HINGES, BUTTS, AND PIVOTS A. Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units. B. Screws: Provide Phillips flat-head screws complying with the following requirements: 1. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots. C. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows: 1. Out-Swing Corridor Doors with Locks: Non-removable pins. 2. Interior Doors: Non-rising pins. 3. Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves, except where hospital tip (HT) indicated. D. Number of Hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30 inches of additional height. 3.4 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. Comply with Owner's instructions for masterkeying and, except as otherwise indicated, provide individual change key for each lock that is not designated to be keyed alike with group of related locks. 95% Construction Documents DOOR HARDWARE

127 3.5 LOCKS, LATCHES, AND BOLTS A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match hardware set, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide metal strike boxes for all strikes. B. Lock Throw: Provide 3/4-inch minimum throw of latch on pairs of doors. Comply with UL requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts on rated fire openings. 1. Provide 3/4-inch minimum throw of latch for mortise locks. Provide 1-inch minimum throw for all dead bolts. C. Flush Bolt Heads: Minimum of 1/2-inch-diameter rods of brass, bronze, or stainless steel with minimum 12-inch-long rod for doors up to 7'-0" in height. Provide longer rods as necessary for doors exceeding 7'-0" in height. 3.6 CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES A. Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, provide adjustable units complying with ANSI A117.1 provisions for door opening force and delayed action closing. Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for size of door control unit depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. 1. At interior doors, adjust closers for door opening force not to exceed 5 foot-pounds of force. B. Provide all door closers with provisions for through-bolted installation with sex bolts. 3.7 HINGES A. Standard Weight Hinge, Stainless Steel: ANSl/8HMA A 156.1, A5112, Grade 2; ball bearing; square corner; button tip. 1. Size: 4-1/2 inch by 4-1/2 inch unless otherwise indicated on PART 3 of this Section. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Hager Hinge Co.: LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Heavy Duty Mortise Lock: ANSI/BHMA A , Series 1000, Grade 1 1. Lock functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule comply with the following: a. Mortise locks: ANSI/BHMA A Lock throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts to comply with labeled fire door requirements, and as follows: a. Mortise locks: Minimum 3/4-inch latchbolt throw. 3. Rabbeted doors: Provide special rabbeted front and strike on locksets for rabbeted meeting stiles. 4. Backset: 2-3/4 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Products: Sargent Manufacturing Company Division, Essex Industries, Inc.: 8200 Line. a. Trim: PE1, cast lever, forged escutcheon. 3.9 CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cylinders: Same manufacturer as for locks and latches. B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Cylinders: ANSI/BHMA A Key control system: ANSI/BHMA A Cylinder Grade: ANSI/BHMA Grade 1. C. Cylinders: 1. Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following: a. Number of pins: Seven. b. Mortise type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight- or clover-type cam. 95% Construction Documents DOOR HARDWARE

128 c. Rim type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring. d. Bored-lock type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks. e. Provide cylinders for each locking hardware devise. D. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with the following: 1. Interchangeable cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key, and usable with other manufacturers' cylinders. E. Construction Keying: Comply with the following: 1. Construction cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide 10 construction master keys. a. Replace construction cores with permanent cores, as indicated in keying schedule. F. Keying System: Unless otherwise indicated, provide a factory-registered keying system complying with the following requirements: G. Great-Grand Master key system: Cylinders are operated by a change key, a master key, a grand master key, and a great-grand master key. H. Keys: Provide nickel-silver keys complying with the following: 1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation: a. Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE." 2. Quantity: In addition to one extra blank key for each lock, provide the following: a. Cylinder change keys: 2. b. Master keys: 10. c. Grand Master keys: 10. d. Great-Grand Master keys: STRIKES A. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Strikes for bored locks and latches: ANSI/BHMA A Strikes for mortise locks and latches: ANSI/BHMA A B. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows: 1. Flat-lip strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Aluminum-frame strike box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing DOOR TRIM AND ADDITIONAL HARDWARE A. Door Stops: 1. General: Provide wall stop for each door as specified unless wall stop is not suitable for application. a. For doors without closers which would strike a fixed object other than walls, such as cabinets, provide overhead stop. 2. Wall stop: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, L Concealed overhead stop: ANSI/BHMA A 156.8, Grade 1, C a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following 1) Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc.: 1023A. 4. Concealed overhead stop/holder: ANSI/BHMA A 156.8, Grade 1, C a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following 1) Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc.: 1013A. B. Door Silencer: 95% Construction Documents DOOR HARDWARE

129 1. Metal door frames: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, L03011, neoprene or rubber, minimum diameter 1/2 inch; fabricated for drilled-in application to frame HARDWARE FINISHES A. Standard: Comply with ANSI/BHMA A B. Match items to the manufacturer's standard color and texture finish for the latch and lock sets (or push-pull units if no latch or lock sets). C. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are those listed in ANSI/BHMA 630: Satin stainless steel, over stainless steel base material, "Materials and Finishes," including coordination with the traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products. 1. Rust-Resistant Finish: For iron and steel base metal required for exterior work and in "High Humidity" areas (and also when designed with the suffix -RR), provide 0.2-mil-thick copper coating on base metal before applying brass, bronze, nickel, or chromium plated finishes. D. Finishes: Unless otherwise indicated, provide all hardware items fabricated and finished in accordance with the following schedule: 1. Hinges: All interior temperature conditioned spaces; 630/US 32D. 2. Locksets: All interior temperature conditioned spaces; 630/US 32D. 3. Closers: Full cover, painted, or plated as noted. 4. Exit Devices: 630/US 32D. 5. All other devices, unless otherwise indicated: 630/US 32D. a. Trim: Unless otherwise scheduled, provide lever trim and rose for all lock and latch sets matching the following design: PART 4 - EXECUTION 4.1 INSTALLATION A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by Architect. 1. "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute. 2. Compliance with NFPA NWWDA Industry Standard I.S.1.7, "Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved. C. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. D. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. 4.2 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made. 1. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. 95% Construction Documents DOOR HARDWARE

130 B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. UT Health Science Center Houston 4.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Hardware Set 1: Each door to have the following: 1. 4 each Standard weight hinges, stainless steel; each Mortise lever lockset: Classroom function F05; each Concealed overhead stop/holder; 4. 3 each Door silencers. B. Hardware Set 2: Each door to have the following: 1. 4 each Standard weight hinges, stainless steel; each Mortise lever lockset: Office function F05; each Door silencers each Wall Stop END OF SECTION % Construction Documents DOOR HARDWARE

131 SECTION GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. Spontaneous Breakage of Tempered Glass: Failure of tempered glass lites under normal use that is attributed to inclusions of nickel sulfide (NiS) or other deleterious substances in the manufacturing process, causing glass breakage. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for various size openings in nominal thicknesses indicated, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300, according to the following requirements: a. Specified Design Wind Loads: As indicated. C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the requirements of Division 01 section Common Product Requirements, submit a complete listing of all manufacturers, products, model numbers, and designs proposed for use in the Work of this Section. B. Maintain all submittals at the Project Site for use during construction and for distribution to the Owner, through the Architect, upon completion of the Work. C. Submit only the items listed below to the Architect for review in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 sections. D. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain all units of each glass Type from the same primary-glass manufacturer. C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each product and installation method indicated. D. Glass Product Testing: Obtain glass test results for product test reports in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing glass products. 1. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E % Construction Documents GLAZING

132 E. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. F. Fire-Rated Window Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257. G. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and ANSI Z Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. H. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: GANA'S "Glazing Manual" and "Laminated Glass Design Guide." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS G1 A. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated. B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; ¼ thickness, Type I (transparent glass, flat); Quality q3 (glazing select); class, kind, and condition as indicated. C. Heat Soak Testing: Unless manufacturer s standard procedures are more stringent, perform heat soak testing of all fully tempered glass lites by placing glass in an oven at temperatures of 550 F±50 F for a two hour Dwell Time to reduce the potential for spontaneous breakage to 5 lites per 1000 (5/1000). 2.2 ETCHED GLASS- G2 (for use at doors) A. Product: Bendheim, ¼ Tempered, KI-137, Satin Etched 2.3 GLAZING TAPES A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and non-migrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. 95% Construction Documents GLAZING

133 C. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. D. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). 2.5 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with system performance requirements. B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with indoor and outdoor faces. 1. Where butt glazed, or other frameless application, is indicated for interior installations, fabricate glass lights to have a consistent, and maximum, 1/8 inch wide vertical joint. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. F. Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm) as follows: 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing 95% Construction Documents GLAZING

134 tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. 3.4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously around perimeter of opening; not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Where framing joints are vertical, cover these joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Where framing joints are horizontal, cover these joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed. F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. G. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.5 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION % Construction Documents GLAZING

135 SECTION GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. B. Defective Materials include products or materials that are, or have been at any time, wet or damp or that show evidence of mold or mildew contamination. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the requirements of Division 01 section Common Product Requirements, submit a complete listing of all manufacturers, products, model numbers, and designs proposed for use in the Work of this Section. B. Maintain all submittals at the Project Site for use during construction and for distribution to the Owner, through the Architect, upon completion of the Work. C. Submit only the items listed below to the Architect for review in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 sections. D. Submit shop drawings showing locations, fabrication, and installation of control and expansion joints including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of Work. 1. Include control and expansion joints in soffits and furr-downs. E. Submit product data for all mold and moisture resistant products including wall board and joint compound. 1. Included test reports indicating performance under ASTM D 3273 and ASTM D QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from FM's "Approval Guide, Building Products.", UL's "Fire Resistance Directory.", or GA-600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual." B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. STC-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from GA-600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual." 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packaging, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. C. Promptly remove defective materials from the Project Site. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. 95% Construction Documents GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

136 C. Do not install panels that are wet or damp, or have been wet or damp at any time, panels that are moisture damaged, or those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 GYPSUM WALLBOARD GENERAL A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Provide gypsum wallboard complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. B. Gypsum Wallboard: "Regular" Type, except where fire-resistive or special wallboard is required, as follows: 1. Edges: Tapered. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated. C. Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the Work where "Regular" gypsum wallboard is indicated include: 1. CertainTeed Regular Gypsum Board, CertainTeed. 2. "ToughRock," GP Gypsum Corp. 3. "Regular Gypsum Board," Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. 4. "Regular Gypsum Board"; Temple Inland Forest Products Inc. 5. "SHEETROCK Brand Gypsum Panels," United States Gypsum Co. 2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound; use at exposed panel edges. 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. A. Acoustical Tape 1. 3/8 thick sound isolation padding pate; grey B. Joint Treatment Materials: 95% Construction Documents GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

137 1. Joint Compound: Setting-type joint compound achieving a rating of 10 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3273 and evaluated in accordance with ASTM D Joint Tape for Glass Mat Gypsum Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 3. Joint Tape for Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. D. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud size. E. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Unfaced mineral fiber blanket insulation produced by combining mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type I (blankets without membrane facing); and as follows: 1. Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass, slag, or rock wool. a. Johns Manville Corp. "Sound Shield" Sound Control Batts. b. Owens Corning Sound Attenuation Fire Batts/MW. 2. Provide blankets in manufacturer's standard nominal thickness corresponding to the wall stud width. F. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. Provide sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/l or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). G. Outlet Putty Pads: At acoustically rated partitions, as indicated on Drawings, provide putty pads for electrical and communications boxes. 1. Provide pads that maintain acoustical ratings when tested in accordance with ASTM C Comply with Underwriters Laboratories standards UL 263 and UL PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Suspended Ceilings: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers at spacing required to support ceilings and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devises indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction. 3.3 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216. B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. C. Where gypsum drywall is indicated at inside face of exterior walls, provide only special mold and mildewresistant type board at those locations. 1. Use Mold And Moisture-Resistant Joint Treatment Materials at all locations where mold and mildew-resistant type board is installed. 95% Construction Documents GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

138 D. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. E. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place. F. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. G. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. H. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. I. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. J. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant. K. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. L. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including electrical and communications boxes. 1. Seal partitions above acoustical ceilings. M. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations. N. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches (203.2 mm) o.c. 3.4 PANEL APPLICATION METHODS A. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing), according to the framing system manufacturer s requirements for spanning capability. a. Comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly requirements. 3. Stagger abutting vertical joints between boards not less than one framing member on opposite side of metal stud partitions. a. Minimize end joints. 4. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 5. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. B. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. 95% Construction Documents GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

139 3.5 INSTALLING DRYWALL PENETRATION BARRIER MESH A. Apply barrier mesh units perpendicular to framing members with end joints staggered and located over framing members. 1. Overlap barrier mesh units at end joints so that each unit is properly secured to framing. 2. Use manufacturers standard fastening clips and recommended fasteners at spacing recommended by manufacturer for type of barrier mesh unit and specific application. 3.6 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings. If not indicated, install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. 3.7 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for locations indicated: 1. Level 1: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies. 2. Level 2: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges. a. Locations: Where water-resistant gypsum backing board panels form substrates for tile, and other locations indicated. 3. Level 3: Embed tape and apply separate first and fill coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges. a. Locations: Where gypsum board surfaces are indicated to receive medium- or heavy-textured finishes before painting. 4. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges. a. Locations: All other glass-mat and paper-faced gypsum wallboard surfaces except where Level 5 finish is indicated below or on Drawings. 5. Level 5: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges, and apply skim coat of joint compound over entire surface. a. Locations: Entire wall at Dry Erase paint locations: 1) Unless otherwise scheduled or indicated on Drawings, Level 5 finish is not required for storage rooms, closets, and similar small enclosed spaces or surfaces indicated to receive textured finishes, wallcoverings, or flat paints over light textures. E. Partial Finishing: Omit third coat and sanding on concealed drywall construction which is indicated for drywall finishing or which requires finishing to achieve fire-resistance rating, sound rating or to act as air or smoke barrier. F. At all hourly rated smoke partitions, fire partitions, fire/smoke partitions, fire/smoke barriers and fire barriers, permanently mark both sides of wall construction above ceilings with the words "Fire and Smoke Barrier Seal all penetrations to maintain rating". Also include the specific hourly rating of the wall assembly. 1. Use stencils and paint letters at least 2" high with message repeated every 10' unless otherwise required by applicable code. END OF SECTION % Construction Documents GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

140 SECTION NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING UT Health Science Center Houston PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the requirements of Division 01 section Common Product Requirements, submit a complete listing of all manufacturers, products, model numbers, and designs proposed for use in the Work of this Section. B. Maintain all submittals at the Project Site for use during construction and for distribution to the Owner, through the Architect, upon completion of the Work. C. Submit only the items listed below to the Architect for review in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 sections. D. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-loadbearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. C. Horizontal Deflection: For wall assemblies, limited to 1/240 of the wall height based on horizontal loading of 5 lbf/sq. ft. (239 Pa). 2.2 MANUFACTURER A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Clark Dietrich Building Systems. 2. MarinoWare; Division of Ware Ind. 2.3 STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C For Alll Partitions, Minimum Base Metal Thickness: inch (0.792 mm) or members that can show certified third-party testing in accordance with ICC-ES-AC86 that meets ASTM 645 Section Depth: 3 5/8 B. Deep-Leg Deflection Track: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (50.8-mm-) deep flanges. C. Proprietary Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of gypsum board applied to interior partitions resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Steel Network Inc.; VertiClip SLD or VertiTrack VTD Series. 2. Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT). 3. ClarkDietrich Building Systems SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 16 Ga.,0.060 inch (1.52 mm). E. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (12.7 mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 95% Construction Documents NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

141 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: 1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud size. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, castin anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: 1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed-on fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. 2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for installation of gypsum board assemblies and without reducing the fire-resistive material thickness below that which is required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fireresistive materials from damage. 3.3 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Installation Standards: ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. 1. Install components fabricated in Equivalent Thickness in accordance with UL V450 or V438. or UL U Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply to framing installation. 3. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063 that apply to framing installation. 4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Comply with details indicated and with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations or, if none available, with United States Gypsum's "Gypsum Construction Handbook." C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. 1. Isolate ceiling assemblies where they abut or are penetrated by building structure. 2. Isolate partition framing and wall furring where it abuts structure, except at floor. Install slip-type joints at head of assemblies that avoid axial loading of assembly and laterally support assembly. a. Use deep-leg deflection track or proprietary deflection track. b. Use proprietary firestop track at fire-rated partitions. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with steel framing or furring members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 95% Construction Documents NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

142 3.4 INSTALLING STEEL PARTITION AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Install tracks (runners) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum board assemblies abut other construction. 1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls or dis-similar metals, install foam-gasket isolation strip between studs and wall. B. Installation Tolerance: Install each steel framing and furring member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by the faces of adjacent framing. C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board. 1. Cut studs 1/2 inch (13 mm) short of full height to provide perimeter relief. 2. For fire-resistance-rated and STC-rated partitions that extend to the underside of floor/roof slabs and decks or other continuous solid-structure surfaces to obtain ratings, install framing around structural and other members extending below floor/roof slabs and decks, as needed to support gypsum board closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Terminate partition framing at suspended ceilings where indicated. D. Install steel studs so flanges point in the same direction and leading edge or end of each panel can be attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. E. Curved Partitions: 1. Cut top and bottom track (runners) through leg and web at 2-inch (50 mm) intervals for arc length. In cutting lengths of track, allow for uncut straight lengths of not less than 12 inches (300 mm) at ends of arcs. 2. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs. 3. Support outside (cut) leg of track by clinching steel sheet strip, 1 inch- (25 mm-) high-by-thickness of track metal, to inside of cut legs using metal lock fasteners. 1) Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs at stud spacing recommended in writing by gypsum board manufacturer for radii indicated. On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. F. Frame door openings to comply with GA-600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable written recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames. install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. 1. At all jambs of door frames install double studs of 16 Ga., inch (1.52 mm) thickness. 2. Install 16 Ga stud at head (for cripple studs) and secure to jamb studs. 3. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure above. G. Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. END OF SECTION % Construction Documents NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

143 SECTION ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the requirements of Division 01 section Common Product Requirements, submit a complete listing of all manufacturers, products, model numbers, and designs proposed for use in the Work of this Section. B. Maintain all submittals at the Project Site for use during construction and for distribution to the Owner, through the Architect, upon completion of the Work. C. Submit only the items listed below to the Architect for review in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 sections. D. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following: 1. Ceiling suspension system members. 2. Method of attaching suspension system hangers to building structure. 3. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures; air outlets and inlets; speakers; sprinklers; and special moldings at walls, column penetrations, and other junctures of acoustical ceilings with adjoining construction. 4. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/8 inch = 1 foot (1:96). E. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each type of ceiling assembly indicated; in sets for each color, texture, and pattern specified, showing the full range of variations expected in these characteristics. 1. Full-size samples of each acoustical panel type, pattern, and color. 2. Set of 12-inch- (300-mm-) long samples of exposed suspension system members, including moldings, for each color and system type required. F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. G. Product Test Reports: Indicate compliance of acoustical panel ceilings and components with requirements based on comprehensive testing of current products. H. Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of acoustical panel ceilings and components' compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed acoustical panel ceilings similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful inservice performance. B. Source Limitations for Ceiling Units: Obtain each acoustical ceiling panel from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. C. Source Limitations for Suspension System: Obtain each suspension system from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. 1. Obtain both acoustical ceiling panels and suspension system from the same manufacturer. D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements: 1. Surface-burning characteristics of acoustical panels comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E % Construction Documents ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

144 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels and suspension system components to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, firesuppression system, and partition assemblies. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CEILING PANEL ACT-1 A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50. B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency. C. Product: Chicago Metalic, Eurostone, White, Terric 1. Pattern: E (Lightly Textured) 2. Color White 3. LR: Not less than NRC: Not less than CAC: Not less than Edge Detail: Reveal 7. Thickness: 7/8 8. Size: 24 inch x 24 inch 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. The notes and schedules in the documents establish manufacturer and model/design for ceiling panels required for the Project. Provide the products listed unless Architect approves products of another manufacturer which complies with requirements for this project. 2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Product: Chigaco Metallic: Ultraline Finish: white 2. Face Design: Continuous slot 25% Construction Documents ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

145 B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements. C. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated. D. Attachment Devices: Size for five times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung, unless otherwise indicated. E. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc-Coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung) will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire. F. Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material and finish as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 1. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member. 2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly. 3. For narrow-face suspension systems, provide suspension system and manufacturer's standard edge moldings that match width and configuration of exposed runners. G. Impact Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard impact-clip system designed to absorb impact forces against acoustical panels. 2.4 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following requirements: 1. Product is effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant; Pecora Corp. 2. SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant; United States Gypsum Co. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage, and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION 25% Construction Documents ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

146 A. Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with publications referenced below per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." 1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension System Installations: Comply with ASTM C Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with ASTM E U.B.C.'s "Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and for Lay-in Panel Ceilings": U.B.C. Standard B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted with fire-resistance-rated ceilings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure; that are appropriate for substrate; and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or drilled-in anchors that extend through forms into concrete. 6. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 7. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 8. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; and provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends of each member. C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings. 2. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 3. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system members with box-shaped flanges, install panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension system surfaces and panel faces flush with bottom face of runners. 4. Paint cut panel edges remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. 5. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having jurisdiction, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated or required. 25% Construction Documents ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

147 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION % Construction Documents ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

148 SECTION RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the requirements of Division 01 section Common Product Requirements, submit a complete listing of all manufacturers, products, model numbers, and designs proposed for use in the Work of this Section. B. Maintain all submittals at the Project Site for use during construction and for distribution to the Owner, through the Architect, upon completion of the Work. C. Submit only the items listed below to the Architect for review in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 sections. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but more than 11 inches long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required. 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: hours before installation. 2. During installation hours after installation. B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C). C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for every 500 linear feet (150 linear m) or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: A. Manufacturer and color to match existing. Verify with owner. 2.2 RUBBER BASE A. Rubber Wall Base: Products complying with ASTM F-1861 Type TS, Thermoset Vulcanized Rubber, and as follows: 1. Height: 6 inches 2. Minimum Nominal Thickness: 1/8 inch. 3. Lengths: Coils in lengths standard with manufacturer but not less than 100 feet. 4. Exterior Corners: Job-formed only. 5. Interior Corners: Job-formed only. 95% Construction Documents RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

149 6. Ends: Premolded. B. Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Carpet Edge Guard: Roppe # Reducer Strip: Roppe # 21. C. Provide accessories in proper thickness to accommodate adjacent flooring materials. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturers for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates for Stair Accessories: Prepare according to ASTM F Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. 3. Moisture Testing: a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m). b. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. 4. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. E. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1. Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 95% Construction Documents RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

150 3.3 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. D. Do not stretch wall base during installation. E. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. F. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without removing more than one fourth the wall base thickness. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form by cutting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer. B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1. Apply protective floor polish to stair accessory surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes if recommended in writing by manufacturer. a. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service. END OF SECTION % Construction Documents RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

151 SECTION CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the requirements of Division 01 section Common Product Requirements, submit a complete listing of all manufacturers, products, model numbers, and designs proposed for use in the Work of this Section. B. Maintain all submittals at the Project Site for use during construction and for distribution to the Owner, through the Architect, upon completion of the Work. C. Submit only the items listed below to the Architect for review in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 sections. D. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate required. E. Shop Drawings: Indicate the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet. 2. Existing flooring materials to remain. 3. Carpet type, color, and dye lot. 4. Locations where dye lot changes occur. 5. Seam locations, types, and methods. 6. Type of subfloor. 7. Type of installation. 8. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point. 9. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 10. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 11. Transition details to other flooring materials. F. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Sample. 2. Exposed Edge Stripping and Accessory: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples. 3. Carpet Seam: 6-inch (150-mm) Sample. 4. Mitered Carpet Border Seam: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Sample. Show carpet pattern alignment. G. Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. H. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 01. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 95% Construction Documents CARPETING

152 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard 2011, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard 2011, Section 7, "Site Conditions - All Installations." B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. C. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet, install carpet before installing these items. 1.5 WARRANTY A. General: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Carpet Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet manufacturer agreeing to replace carpet that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET TILE 1. Manufacture: Interface Flor 2. Pattern: Chenille Wrap 3. Style: Color: 3688 Remembrance 5. Size: 50 cm x 50 cm 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided by or recommended by the manufacturer of the carpet. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and that is recommended by the manufacturer of the carpet. C. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with requirements specified. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 95% Construction Documents CARPETING

153 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by the manufacturer of the carpet. 2. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard 2011, Section 7, "Site Conditions All Installations," and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet installation. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by the manufacturer of the carpet. D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. For Modular Carpet, comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard 2011, Section 18, "Modular Carpet," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Installation Method: Unless otherwise indicated, install every tile with full-spread, releasable, pressuresensitive adhesive. C. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard 2011, Section 13, "Direct Glue-Down Installation." D. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position. 1. Bevel adjoining border edges at seams with hand shears. E. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet. F. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, outlets, edgings, and threshold. Treat cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. G. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. H. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. I. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI Carpet Installation Standard 2011, Section 15, "Protecting Indoor Installations." 95% Construction Documents CARPETING

154 C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer. END OF SECTION % Construction Documents CARPETING

155 SECTION SOUND BARRIER MULLION TRIM CAP PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section SUMMARY A. Section includes sound barrier mullion trim caps providing sound transmission control at curtain wall. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealing. 2. Section "Curtain Wall and Glazed Assemblies" for curtain wall construction. 3. Section "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for interior wall construction. 4. Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for interior wall construction 5. Section "Fire Rated Sound Barrier Mullion Trim Caps" for sound transmission and firerated mullion trim systems ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for sound barrier wall end cap system. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include typical dimensioned cross-section(s) at the location where drywall partition terminates at the perimeter curtain wall, indicating: a. Dimensions b. Finish C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. 1. Size: 6 inch (152 mm) sound barrier mullion trim cap sample and 2 x3-1/2 (51 mm x 89 mm) custom color paint sample INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For each sound barrier mullion trim cap assembly, for ASTM E 90 tests performed by a qualified third party testing agency QUALITY ASSURANCE SOUND BARRIER WALL END CAP

156 A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of aluminum extrusions and anodizing shall be ISO-9001 certified. B. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are approved by manufacturer. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: ASTM E 90 testing to be performed by laboratory accredited by IAS as complying with ISO/IEC Standard DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver sound barrier mullion trim caps until spaces to receive them are clean, dry, and ready for their installation. B. Store sound barrier mullion trim caps in original undamaged packaging inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace sound barrier mullion trim caps that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Ten years limited warranty from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Limited warranty does not cover adjacent products or improper installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. MULL-it-OVER Products; Sound barrier mullion trim cap systems. a. Tel: (616) b. url: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide sound barrier mullion trim caps of design, basic profile, materials, and operation indicated. Provide units with capability to accommodate variations in adjacent surfaces. 1. Furnish units in lengths of sufficient additional length to allow for field trimming to required length to match variations in construction tolerances of adjacent systems PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Sound Transmission: 1. Double-Sided Installations: STC 55 B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Mullion trim cap to be sized to accommodate thermal movement. SOUND BARRIER WALL END CAP

157 2.04 SOUND BARRIER MULLION TRIM CAP A. Sound Barrier Mullion Trim Cap: 1. Products: MULL-it-OVER Products; Mullion Trim Cap. B. Profile: 55 Classic Mullion Trim Cap 2.05 COMPONENTS A. Aluminum Extrusions: 1. Thickness: inches. 2. Profile: As selected and approved by Architect to allow solid attachment and fastening to the partition wall framing. B. Sound Absorbing Foam: 1. Resistant to smoke, flame, and microbial growth. 2. Fire Rating: ASTM E 84 Class Fungi Resistance: Zero rating per ASTM G 21. C. Compressible Foam: Between edge of extrusion and interior face of curtain wall glass. 1. Thickness: Standard 1/2 inch (12.7 mm 2. Color: Light gray D. Fasteners: 1. Self Tapping or appropriate threaded fastener. 2. Compatible with all materials fasteners will contact with and not causing galvanic corrosion. E. Snap Cover: Snap-on fastener cover. F. Acoustical Sound Sealant: Acrylic latex based ACCESSORIES A. Provide necessary and related parts and tools to complete installation FABRICATION A. Extrusions and generic profiles to be shipped in custom lengths as required to meet project requirements or shipped in standard incremental foot lengths and cut to exact length on jobsite FINISHES A. Exposed surfaces of exposed aluminum extrusion: SOUND BARRIER WALL END CAP

158 1. Standard Finish: Supplied in clear anodized finish. 2. Custom Finish: Custom anodized finishes and painted finishes available upon request. B. Finishes: 1. Aluminum - clear anodize: a. Clear anodized finish in accordance with AA-M10 C22 A41 Class I (0.7 to 1.0 thick anodic coating) 2. Aluminum - color anodize or painted: a. Color Choice with matte or bright finish. Select from manufacturer's custom color offering. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine walls and adjacent curtain wall for suitable conditions where sound barrier wall end cap will be installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected INSTALLATION A. Measure and cut sound barrier wall end cap to proper lengths. B. Notch around horizontal mullions, sills, or other obstructions leaving appropriate gap for differential movement between the sound barrier wall end cap and the obstruction. C. Apply continuous bead of acoustical sealant to the unexposed side of extruded aluminum surface that will be in contact with the drywall edge. D. Place sound barrier wall end cap on the vertical surface of the drywall partition wall and loosely install fasteners in the top and bottom slotted holes of the wall end cap. E. Plumb the wall end cap leaving recommended gap spacing between the interior glass surface and the wall end cap. Foam gasket to be in contact with glass. F. Tighten top and bottom fasteners to secure end cap. G. Install additional fasteners at 12 inches on center, minimum. H. Install snap cover to conceal fasteners. I. Apply color matched sealant at joints of dissimilar materials as desired. SOUND BARRIER WALL END CAP

159 3.03 CLEANING A. After work is complete in adjacent areas, clean exposed surfaces with suitable cleaner that will not harm or attack the finish PROTECTION A. Protect sound barrier wall end caps from damage during installation, general construction activities, and until turnover of structure. END OF SECTION SOUND BARRIER WALL END CAP

160 SECTION PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the documents indicate that the surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final finish, and factory-applied prefinished surfaces of certain equipment including, but not limited to; electrical panel covers, equipment supports, and equipment exposed to view on the roof. 2. At Unoccupied interior spaces, painting is not required on prefinished items or finished metal surfaces B. Do not paint operating parts, and labels. 1. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. c. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. 2. Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels and warnings or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. "Paint" includes coating systems materials, primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate, or finish coats. 1. Substrate" as used herein means the surface to which paint is to be applied. In the case of previously painted existing surfaces, substrate means the surface to which the existing paint was applied. B. Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. 1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85- degree meter. 2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 3. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 4. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at a 60- degree meter. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the requirements of Division 01 section Common Product Requirements, submit a complete listing of all manufacturers, products, model numbers, and designs proposed for use in the Work of this Section. B. Maintain all submittals at the Project Site for use during construction and for distribution to the Owner, through the Architect, upon completion of the Work. C. Submit only the items listed below to the Architect for review in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 sections. D. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers. 1. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material. 95% Construction Documents PAINTING

161 E. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate. 1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each Sample for location and application. 3. Submit samples on the following substrates for Architect's review of color and texture only: a. Painted Gypsum Drywall: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Samples for each color and material on gypsum wallboard. b. Stained or Natural Wood: 4-by-8-inch (100-by-200-mm) Samples of natural- or stainedwood finish on representative surfaces. c. Ferrous and Non-Ferrous Metal: 4-inch- (100-mm-) square Samples of flat metal and 8- inch- (200-mm-) long Samples of solid metal for each color and finish. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. C. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample for each type of coating and substrate required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate finish of approved sample Submittals. 1. Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each type of coating and substrate. a. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). b. Small Areas and Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Apply benchmark samples, according to requirements for the completed Work, after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. Provide required sheen, color, and texture on each surface. a. After finishes are accepted, Architect will use the room or surface to evaluate coating systems of a similar nature. 3. Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Color name and number. 6. VOC content. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C). B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 45 and 95 deg F (7 and 35 deg C). 95% Construction Documents PAINTING

162 C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 1. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. C. Colors: As indicated by manufacturer's designations 2.2 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Provide the following paint systems and number of coats for the various substrates indicated. Provide only the listed prime and finish coat materials unless different primer is recommended in writing by the finish coat paint manufacturer for each specific substrate. 1. Where specific finish paint material is not indicated, refer to notes and finish schedules for finish paint material and gloss levels for each surface to be painted. B. Low-Odor System for Gypsum Drywall; 2 low-odor finish coats over low-odor primer. 1. Low Odor Interior Latex Primer: a. S-W: ProMar 200, Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer B28W2600. C. Ferrous Metal; 2 finish coats of water borne semi-gloss acrylic latex enamel over primer: 1. Waterborne Acrylic Primer: a. S-W: Pro-Cryl Universal Water Based Primer B D. Interior Low-Odor System Finish Coats: 1. Low-Odor Interior Eggshell Acrylic Emulsion: a. S-W: ProMar 200 Zero VOC E. Dry Erase 1. S-W: Dry Erase Clear Gloss 2-part system 95% Construction Documents PAINTING

163 F. Finish Coat for Aluminum, Ferrous Metals, and Galvanized Metals: 1. Pro Industrial High Performance Acrylic B Series. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for paint application. 1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations. a. Blast steel surfaces clean, unless more stringent preparation is recommended by paint system manufacturer, according to SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3. b. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. c. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat. D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 95% Construction Documents PAINTING

164 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection. 5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. 7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 9. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer. E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed to view in equipment rooms and occupied spaces. F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Uninsulated metal piping. 2. Uninsulated plastic piping. 3. Pipe hangers and supports. 4. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. 5. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets. 95% Construction Documents PAINTING

165 6. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having "all-service jacket" or other paintable jacket material. 7. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Switchgear. 2. Panelboards. 3. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. H. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. I. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. K. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied: 1. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to sample paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by Owner: a. Quantitative materials analysis. b. Abrasion resistance. c. Apparent reflectivity. d. Flexibility. e. Washability. f. Absorption. g. Accelerated weathering. h. Dry opacity. i. Accelerated yellowness. j. Recoating. k. Skinning. l. Color retention. m. Alkali and mildew resistance. B. Owner may direct Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with the noncomplying paint. If necessary, Contractor may be required to remove noncomplying paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are incompatible. 3.5 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from Project site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces. 95% Construction Documents PAINTING

166 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work. 1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1. END OF SECTION % Construction Documents PAINTING

167 SECTION WINDOW TREATMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with the requirements of Division 01 section Common Product Requirements, submit a complete listing of all manufacturers, products, model numbers, and designs proposed for use in the Work of this Section. B. Maintain all submittals at the Project Site for use during construction and for distribution to the Owner, through the Architect, upon completion of the Work. C. Submit only the items listed below to the Architect for review in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 sections. D. Shop drawings for special components and application conditions that are not fully dimensioned or detailed in manufacturers' product data. Show relationships to adjoining work. 1. Include typical elevation layout indicating proposed division between blind units and meeting edges at corners. Provide sections and details at head and sill between blind units and corners including inclined installations. 2. Provide schedule of all units to be furnished, including field measurements at each location. E. Samples for initial selection of colors, in form of manufacturers' color charts consisting of sections of exposed components with integral or applied finishes showing full range of colors and materials. F. Samples for verification purposes, in full-size units of each component, material, and finish to be exposed to view, for each type of window treatment required. Prepare samples from same materials to be used for fabricating units. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide units produced by one manufacturer for each type required, with complete standard assemblies including hardware accessory items, mounting brackets, and fastenings. B. Furnish materials in colors and patterns selected by Architect from manufacturers' standard colors/patterns. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS A. Headrail: Channel-shaped section complete with tilting mechanism, top and end braces, top cradles, cord lock, and accessory items required for type of blind and installation. B. Bottom Rail: Tubular steel bottom rail, designed to withstand twisting or sagging. Contour top surface to match slat curvature, with flat or slightly curved bottom. Close ends with metal or plastic end caps of same color as rail. Finish rail in same color as slats. C. Slats: Spring-tempered aluminum (louver blades), rounded corners with forming burrs removed, as follows: 1. Slat Width: 1-inch (25mm) nominal slats, with other components sized to suit. a. Provide slats designed and spaced to achieve maximum overlap and closure for optimum light exclusion. D. Ladders: Designed to support and maintain slats at proper spacing and alignment in open and closed positions, as follows: 1. Braided polyester cord design consisting of vertical components of not less than inch nor more than inch in diameter and integrally braided ladder rungs of not less than 4 threads; space ladders not further than 23 inches apart and 7 inches from ends of slats. 95% Construction Documents WINDOW TREATMENT

168 E. Tilting Mechanism: Assembly including disengaging worm and gear mechanism to eliminate overdrive, low-friction gear tilter, drum and cradle at each ladder, tilt rod, tape clips, and grommet guides to prevent wear on ladder and cords; designed to hold slats at any angle and prevent movement of slats due to vibration, operated as follows: 1. Wand Operator: Detachable clear plastic wand, of proper length to suit blind installation, detachable without tools by raising locking sleeve. F. Lifting Mechanism: Crashproof cord locks with cord separators and braided polyester or nylon lift cords with tassels at ends. Size cord to suit blind type. Include self-aligning cord equalizers designed to maintain horizontal blind position. G. Installation Brackets: Designed to facilitate removal of head channels. Provide intermediate brackets at spacing recommended by blind manufacturer. Include hardware necessary for secure attachment of brackets to adjoining construction and to headrails. Design brackets to support safely the weight of blind assemblies plus forces applied to operate blinds. H. Finish: Provide finishes indicated below. Finish exposed accessories and hardware to match rail color. Provide corrosion- resistant finish to concealed items of hardware. 1. Steel Components: Galvanize and either phosphate coat or prime exposed steel surfaces. Finish with baked-on synthetic resin enamel finish. 2. Aluminum Slats: Chemical conversion coat then follow with baked-on synthetic resin enamel finish coat. I. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Hunter Douglas Contract. 2. Levolor / Kirsch; a Newell Rubbermaid company. 3. Mariak. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install window treatment units to comply with manufacturer's instructions. Position units level, plumb, secure, and at proper height and location relative to adjoining window units and other related work. Securely anchor units with clips, brackets, and anchorages suited to type of substrate. B. Provide clearance between sash and blinds to permit unencumbered operation of sash hardware. C. Isolate metal parts from concrete and mortar to prevent galvanic action. Use thick coating or other means recommended by manufacturer to effect separation. D. Protect installed units to ensure their being in operating condition, without damage, blemishes, or indication of use at substantial completion of project. Correct nonconforming damaged units. Replace units that cannot be field corrected. END OF SECTION % Construction Documents WINDOW TREATMENT